Pioneer VSX-1021-K, VSX-921-K OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Download

Page 1

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER RECEPTOR AUDIO-VIDEO MULTICANAL

VSX-1021-K VSX-921-K

Operating Instructions

Manual de instrucciones

Page 2

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 40 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En

DO NOT OPEN

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_A1_En

Singapore model only

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2*_A2_En

Page 3

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Contents

01 Before you start

Checking what’s in the box ............................ 5

Installing the receiver .....................................5

Loading the batteries ...................................... 5

Operating range of remote control unit........ 5

Canceling the demo display ..........................5

About operation of the receiver with a

mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.) ............. 5

About using AVNavigator (included

CD-ROM) ......................................................... 5

02 Controls and displays

Remote control ............................................... 7

Display ............................................................. 8

Front panel ...................................................... 9

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment ........................ 10

Rear panel ..................................................... 10

Determining the speakers’ application ...... 11

Placing the speakers .................................... 12

Connecting the speakers .............................12

Installing your speaker system .................... 13

Selecting the Speaker system ..................... 14

About the audio connection ........................14

About the video converter ............................14

About HDMI .................................................. 15

Connecting your TV and playback

components ..................................................16

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD

recorder and other video sources ............... 17

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or

other set-top box ...........................................18

Connecting other audio components ......... 18

Connecting AM/FM antennas ..................... 19

MULTI-ZONE setup ....................................... 19

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface ................................................ 20

Connecting optional Bluetooth

ADAPTER ......................................................20

Connecting an iPod ......................................20

Connecting a USB device ............................21

Connecting an HDMI-equipped

component to the front panel input ............ 21

Connecting to the front panel video

terminal .........................................................21

Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 21

Connecting an IR receiver ...........................21

Operating other Pioneer components

with this unit’s sensor .................................. 22

Plugging in the receiver ............................... 22

04 Basic Setup

Changing the TV format setting ..................23

Changing the frequency step ......................23

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) ........................................... 23

Automatically conducting optimum

sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 23

The Input Setup menu .................................. 25

Operation Mode Setup ................................. 25

05 Basic playback

Playing a source ...........................................27

Playing an iPod ............................................. 27

Playing a USB device ................................... 28

Listening to the radio ....................................30

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless

Enjoyment of Music ...................................... 30

06 Listening to your system

Auto playback ...............................................33

Listening in surround sound .......................33

Using Stream Direct ..................................... 34

Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 34

Choosing the input signal ............................34

Better sound using Phase Control ..............35

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ...............36

Features of Home Media Gallery ................. 36

Introduction ................................................... 36

Playback with Home Media Gallery ............ 37

Advanced operations for Internet radio ......38

About network playback............................... 38

About playable file formats .......................... 39

08 Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function .......41

Making Control with HDMI connections ....41

HDMI Setup................................................... 41

Before using synchronization ......................42

About synchronized operations ..................42

Setting the PQLS function ...........................42

Cautions on the Control with HDMI

function .........................................................42

09 Using other functions

Setting the Audio options ............................44

Setting the Video options .............................46

Switching the speaker terminals ................ 47

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ................. 47

Making an audio or a video recording ........ 48

Reducing the level of an analog signal ....... 48

Using the sleep timer ................................... 48

Dimming the display .................................... 48

Checking your system settings ...................48

Resetting the system ....................................48

10 Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu...................50

Operating multiple receivers .......................50

Setting the remote to control other

components ..................................................50

Selecting preset codes directly ...................50

Programming signals from other

remote controls ............................................. 51

Erasing one of the remote control

button settings ..............................................51

Erasing all learnt settings that are in

one input function ........................................ 51

Direct function .............................................. 51

Multi Operation and System Off .................. 52

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 53

Controlling components ..............................54

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu .............................56

Automatic MCACC (Expert) ......................... 56

Manual MCACC setup ................................. 58

Checking MCACC Data ................................60

Data Management........................................61

12 The System Setup and Other

Setup menus

Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu .....................................62

Manual speaker setup ..................................62

Network Setup menu ................................... 64

Checking the Network Information ............. 65

The Other Setup menu ................................. 66

13 Additional information

Troubleshooting 1 ......................................... 68

Troubleshooting 2 ......................................... 74

Troubleshooting of wireless LAN ................76

About status messages ............................... 78

Important information regarding the

HDMI connection .........................................78

Cleaning the unit .......................................... 78

Surround sound formats ............................. 79

About iPod ..................................................... 79

About FLAC ................................................... 79

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct

with different input signal formats ..............80

Pioneer Authorized Distributors .................81

Glossary ......................................................... 81

Features index ............................................... 84

Specifications ...............................................85

Preset code list..............................................86

Page 4

Flow of settings on the receiver

Flow for connecting and setting the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12

Important

The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 5 .

1 Before you start

! Checking what’s in the box on page 5 ! Loading the batteries on page 5

2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 11)

! 7.1 channel surround system (Front height) ! 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide) ! 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) ! 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

3 Connecting the speakers

! Placing the speakers on page 12 ! Connecting the speakers on page 12 ! Installing your speaker system on page 13 ! Bi-amping your speakers on page 13

4 Connecting the components

! About the audio connection on page 14 ! About the video converter on page 14 ! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 16 ! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 19 ! Plugging in the receiver on page 22

5 Power On

6 Making the initial settings according to the region and environment in which you live

! Changing the TV format setting (page 23) ! Changing the frequency step (page 23) ! Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 23)

7 MCACC speaker settings

! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23

8 The Input Setup menu (page 25)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections)

9 Basic playback (page 27)

10 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

! Using the various listening modes (page 33) ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 35) ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 56) ! Changing the channel level while listening (page 63) ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page

44)

! Setting the PQLS function (page 42) ! Setting the Audio options (page 44) ! Setting the Video options (page 46)

11 Other optional adjustments and settings

! Control with HDMI function (page 41) ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 56) ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 62)

12 Making maximum use of the remote control

! Operating multiple receivers (page 50) ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 50)

Page 5

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:

! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m) ! Remote control unit ! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm

system operation) x2

! AM loop antenna ! FM wire antenna ! iPod cable ! Power cord ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! These operating instructions

Installing the receiver

! When installing this unit, make sure to put it

on a level and stable surface.

! Don’t install it on the following places:

— on a color TV (the screen may distort) — near a cassette deck (or close to a device that

gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

— in direct sunlight — in damp or wet areas — in extremely hot or cold areas — in places where there is vibration or other

movement

— in places that are very dusty — in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as

a kitchen)

! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel

while the power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on (or right after it is turned off) and could cause burns.

Loading the batteries

The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.

WARNING

! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight

or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

! Never use new and old batteries together. ! Insert the plus and minus sides of the

batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

! Batteries with the same shape may have

different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

! When disposing of used batteries, please

comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

(Symbol examples for batteries)

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

K058c_A1_En

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if: ! There are obstacles between the remote

control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining

onto the remote sensor.

! The receiver is located near a device that is

emitting infrared rays.

! The receiver is operated simultaneously with

another infrared remote control unit.

30°

7 m

Canceling the demo display

On this receiver, the demo mode is turned on by default. When the power is turned on, the demo display is set and various indications are shown on the front panel display. To cancel the demo display, connect the power cord, then perform the operation below. ! The demo mode is canceled automatically

when the Full Auto MCACC operation is performed.

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘FL DEMO’ using TUNE i/j. 4 Use PRESET k/l to select FL DEMO c

OFF d then press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel.

About operation of the receiver with a mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

The receiver can be controlled from the mobile terminal by installing a special application on the mobile terminal. For details, see the product information on the Pioneer website. This special application may be changed or discontinued without notice.

About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM)

The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver’s connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings. There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions, including an Interactive Manual that operates in association with the receiver, updating of various types of software, and MCACC Application that lets you check the MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.

Page 6

01 Before you start

Installing AVNavigator

1 Load the included AVNavigator CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.

! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed

to step 2.

! If the installation screen does not appear,

double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).

2 Follow the instructions on the screen to install.

When “Finish” is selected, installation is completed.

3 Remove the included AVNavigator CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.

Handling the CD-ROM

Operating Environment

! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft®

Windows® XP/Vista/7.

! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator

functions. The supported browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other browsers, some functions may be limited or the display may not appear properly. Also, even with a supported browser, depending on the browser’s settings, some functions may be limited and the display may not appear properly.

Precautions For Use

! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal

computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player. Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume.

License

! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated

below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use.

Also agree to the “License Agreement”

displayed when installing AVNavigator.

! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM

belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION. Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions. Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER CORPORATION.

General Disclaimer

! PIONEER CORPORATION does not

guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation. The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.

Using AVNavigator

1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to launch AVNavigator.

AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up. The language selection screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings. Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched.

2 Select and use the desired function.

AVNavigator includes the following functions:

! Wiring Navi – Guides you through

connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be made easily.

! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays

the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on the receiver. It is also possible to operate the receiver from the Interactive Manual.

! Glossary – Displays glossary pages. ! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced

MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer.

There are special operating instructions

for MCACC Application. These instructions are included in the AVNavigator Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them when using MCACC Application.

! Software Update – Allows various types of

software to be updated.

! Settings – Used to make various

AVNavigator settings.

! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.

Note

To use the AVNavigator of another model, first uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator, then install the AVNavigator of the other model.

Deleting the AVNavigator

You can use the following method to uninstall (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.

% Delete from the Control Panel of the PC.

From the Start menu, click “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator(VSX-1021 or VSX-921)” d “Uninstall”.

Page 7

Controls and displays

Remote control

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

2,3

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR

SAT

HMG

CDTV

USB

iPod

SELECT

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

TV CTRL

TUNER

VIDEO

RECEIVER

ZONE 2

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

VOL

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TUNE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNE

PGM

CTRL STATUS

PHASE

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ADPT

VIDEO

T.EDIT

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

12 13

PRESET

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

! White – Receiver control, TV control ! Blue – Other controls (See pages 27, 28, 30, 30

and 54.)

1 u RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 52).

3 RCU SETUP

Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode (page 50).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (page 50). Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input function (page 27).

5 ZONE 2

Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page

47).

6 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button.

7 Receiver setting buttons

Press first to access:

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 44).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 46).

! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 23, 25, 41, 56 and 62).

! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the

current menu screen.

8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 56) and the Audio or Video options (page 44 or 46).

9 Receiver Control buttons

Press first to access:

! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control (page 35).

! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver

settings (page 48).

! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 42).

! S.RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality

sound to compressed audio sources (page

44).

! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 34).

! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC

presets (page 34).

! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep

mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 48).

! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a

channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (page 63).

! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an

analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 48).

! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 48).

10 LISTENING MODE controls

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 33), Auto Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode (page 34).

! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback

mode (page 33).

! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding

and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.) (page 33).

! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the

various surround modes (page 33).

11 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.

12 TV CTRL

Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when controlling the TV (page 50).

Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands). Switch to perform operations in the main zone. Also use this button to set up surround sound.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

15 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Page 8

02 Controls and displays

Display

21 3 9754 108 11 12 13

AUTO

DIGITAL ANALOG

AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x

SP AB

SL SR

HDMI

XL XR

ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SLEEP

L C R

LFE

Neo:6

1 Signal indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 34).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.

! L/R – Left front/Right front channel ! C – Center channel ! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround

channel

! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))

indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones

above

! XC – Either one channel other than the ones

above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital

decoding.

! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital

Plus decoding.

! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD

decoding.

! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding. ! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

CD-R

TUNER

DSD PCM MULTI-ZONE S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX

iPod

PQLS

DVD

ALC

DVR

18 1915 16 17

! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.

! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM

signals.

! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD

Master Audio signals.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 47).

5 SOUND

Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 44).

6 S.RTRV

Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active (page 44).

7 Listening mode indicators

! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto

Surround feature is switched on (page 33).

! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level

control) mode is selected (page 33).

! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure

Direct is selected (page 34).

! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of

the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 33).

! STANDARD – Lights when one of the

Standard Surround modes is switched on (page 33).

ATT

OVER

VIDEO HMG

HDMI

TUNED STEREO MONO

[ 2 ]

USB

[ 3 ]

[ 4 ]

8 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 35).

9 Analog signal indicators

Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal (page 48).

18 Character display

Displays various system information.

19 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 66)

10 Tuner indicators

! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being

received.

! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM

broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set

using MPX.

Lights when the sound is muted.

12 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level. “---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.

13 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

14 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

15 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker system using SPEAKERS (page 47).

16 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page

48).

17 Matrix decoding format indicators

! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2

Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page

33).

! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the

receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 33).

Page 9

Controls and displays

Front panel

1 2 53 34 6 7 8

AUDIO/ VIDEO MULTI-CH ANNEL RECEIVER

ADVANCED

MCACC

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

PHONES

AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

STANDARD SURROUND

109 11 12 13 1614

MCACC

SETUP MIC

12 15 13

1 u STANDBY/ON

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function.

3 Indicators

! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is

set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 44).

! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing

displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 48).

! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-

equipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 16).

! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/

iPhone/iPad is connected (page 20).

5V 2.1

USB

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

HDMI 2 INPUT

iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT

5V 2.1

iPod iPhone iPad

CONTROLSTEREO

USB

ADVANCED SURROUND

iPod iPhone

iPad

4 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page

19) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (page 47).

5 Character display

See Display on page 8 .

6 TUNER controls

! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio

bands (page 30).

! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET

k/l and ENTER to memorize and name

stations for recall (page 30).

! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page

30).

! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page

30).

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

VSX-1021

VSX-921

7 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (page 5).

8 MASTER VOLUME dial

VSX

-1021

9 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker terminal (page 47).

10 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

MASTER VOLUME

11 Listening mode buttons

! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

Switches between Auto Surround (page 33), Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode (page 34).

! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for

Standard decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.) (page 33).

! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch

between the various surround modes (page

33).

! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback

mode (page 33).

12 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (page

23).

13 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as an audio and video source (page 20), or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback (page 21).

14 HDMI input connector

Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) (page 21).

15 AUDIO/VIDEO input

See Connecting to the front panel video terminal on page 21 .

16 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 28).

Page 10

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

CAUTION

Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

Important

Illustration shows the VSX-1021, however connections for the VSX-921 are the same except where noted.

Rear panel

VSX-1021

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

IN1IN

)

LAN

)

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVD

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

TV/SAT

IN1IN

TV/SAT

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)(

)

DVR/BDR

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

Single

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)(

)

DVR/BDR

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

Single

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

)

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

)

AC IN

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VSX-921

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO 1 IN

HDMI

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT DVD ININ

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

DVD ININ

VIDEO 1

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

OUT OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO 1 DVDY PBP

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

DVR/BDR IN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

OUT

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

OUT

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

Note

The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The Input Setup menu on page 25 to change the assignments if other connections are used.

Input function

DVD

TV/SAT OPT-1

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

<a>

VIDEO 1

HDMI 1

<a>

HDMI 2

<a>

a VSX-1021 only b VSX-921 only

HDMI Digital Component

(BD)

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

(VIDEO)

(VIDEO 1)

IN 1

(HDMI 2)

Input Terminals

COAX-1 IN 1

OPT-2 IN 2

COAX-2

<a>

Page 11

Connecting your equipment

Determining the speakers’ application

This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have. ! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left

and right channels (L and R).

! It is also possible to only connect one of the

surround back speakers (SB) or neither.

Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below.

Important

! The Speaker System setting must be made if

you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on page 62 ).

! Sound does not come through simultaneously

from the front height, front wide, speaker B and surround back speakers. Output speakers are different depending on the input signal or listening mode.

[A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front height)

*Default setting

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)

FHR

FHL

SBL

SBR

A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofer (SW). It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height or front wide speakers and the surround back speakers. This surround system produces a more true-tolife sound from above.

[B] 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide)

! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)

FWL

FWR

SBL

SBR

This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers (FWL/FWR). It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height or front wide speakers and the surround back speakers. This surround system produces a true-to-life sound over a wider area.

[C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! Speaker System setting: Speaker B

SBL

SBR

Speaker B

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers.

[D] 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

[E] 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

ZONE 2

Main zone

Sub zone

Other speaker connections

! Your favorite speaker connections can be

selected even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers (except front left/right speakers).

! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect

speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

! After connecting, be sure to conduct the

Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 .

Page 12

03 Connecting your equipment

Placing the speakers

Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.

FHL

FWL

30 30

! Place the surround speakers at 120º from

the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.

! If you intend to connect only one surround

back speaker, place it directly behind you.

! Place the left and right front height speakers

at least one meter directly above the left and right front speakers.

120 120

SBL

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system. ! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.

Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the

FHR

FWR

SBR

subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

! For the best stereo effect, place the front

speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.

! If you’re going to place speakers around your

CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.

! If you’re using a center speaker, place the

front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

! Place the center speaker above or below the

TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

! It is best to angle the speakers towards the

listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

! Surround and surround back speakers should

be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVDAudio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

! Try not to place the surround speakers farther

away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

CAUTION

! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS

LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric

shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is

twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections

CAUTION

Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

1 Twist exposed wire strands together. 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed

wire. 3 Tighten terminal.

1 2 3

10 mm

Note

! Please refer to the manual that came with

your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.

It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

Page 13

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

Standard surround connection

The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.

Front right

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

Surround right

Front height right

Front wide right

Speaker B - right Speaker B - left

Front wide setting

Speaker B setting

Center Subwoofer

Front height setting

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD INBD IN

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

Not connected Not connected

Not connected Surround back

Surround back right

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ZONE 2

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2.

5.1 ch surround setting

6.1 ch surround setting

7.1 ch surround setting

ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

IN1IN

)

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

ZONE 2 setting

Front height left

Front wide left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

)

Single

Surround back left

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

Front left

AC IN

Surround left

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

High

Low

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

DVR/BDR IN

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

Subwoofer

Center

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

(

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

OUTPUT 5 V

OUT

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

( OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

IN1IN

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

)

DVD

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R LR

Surround right Surround left

)

SURROUND

ASSIGNABLE

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

CAUTION

! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High

to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping.

Doing so may damage your speakers.

Front left

Bi-amp compatible speaker

High

Low

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /

(

)

Single

AC IN

Page 14

03 Connecting your equipment

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping. ! With these connections, the Speaker System

setting makes no difference.

CAUTION

! Don’t connect different speakers from the

same terminal in this way.

! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for

bi-amping shown above.

% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

Selecting the Speaker system

The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to for the front height speakers. Also, the surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the surround back speakers. Make this setting according to the application.

Front height setup

*Default setting

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do this.

Front wide setup

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do this.

Speaker B setup

You can listen to stereo playback in another room.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do this.

Bi-Amping setup

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals.

See Bi-amping your speakers on page 13 .

2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do this.

ZONE 2 setup

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard surround connection on page 13 .

2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu.

See Speaker system setting on page 62 to do this.

About the audio connection

Types of cables and terminals

HDMI HD audio

Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio

Digital (Optical)

Sound signal priority

RCA (Analog)

(White/Red)

! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals

can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

Transferable audio signals

Conventional analog audio

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source. If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).

Page 15

Connecting your equipment

Terminal for connection with source device

HDMI IN HDMI OUT

Y PBP

High picture quality

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Video signals can be output

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Note

! If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ) OFF.

! The signal input resolutions that can be

converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.

! Only signals with an input resolution

of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite MONITOR OUT terminals.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology. This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections. ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video

(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))

! 3D signal transfer ! Deep Color signal transfer ! x.v.Color signal transfer ! ARC (Audio Return Channel) ! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital

audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

! Input of the following digital audio formats:

— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High

bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD

! Synchronized operation with components

using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI function on page 41 )

Note

! An HDMI connection can only be made

with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

! If you connect a component that

is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

! Depending on the component you have

connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

! Use a High Speed HDMI

cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is used, it may not work properly.

! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer

is connected, it may not operate properly.

! Signal transfer is only possible when

connected to a compatible component.

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions

require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

! Turning on/off the device connected to this

unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.

“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Page 16

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 41 ).

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI/DVI-compatible Blu-ray Disc player

DVD INBD IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

VIDEO

TV/SAT

OUT OUT

OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

HDMI INHDMI OUT HDMI OUT

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DVR/BDR IN

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

IN1IN

DVD

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

DIGITAL OUT

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

Select one

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

Single

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver.

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

VSX-1021 only

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 16 ).

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables.

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 41 ).

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

)

FRONT CENTER

IN1IN

DVD

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

R L R L R L

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

CD-R/TAPE

HDMI IN

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

OUT

(

ZONE 2

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

AM LOOP

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables (page 16).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

DVD player, etc.

Select one Select one

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(CD)(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

)

Single

SPEAKERS

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Page 17

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver. ! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with

an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and player.

DVD player, etc.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

Select one

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

TV/SAT

DVD ININ

Select one Select one

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

OUT OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

IN1IN

DVD

HDMI OUT

ASSIGNABLE

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

COAXIAL OPTICAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

Single

DIGITAL OUT

)

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

AUDIO IN ANALOG

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

CD-R/TAPE

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

ZONE 2

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

Select one

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

IN1IN

DVD

DIGITAL OUT

ASSIGNABLE

(CD)(

)

SURROUND

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to

input video signals.

Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI

and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables (page 16).

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback

only) (page 48).

! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we

recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ).

Page 18

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

STB

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

CD-R/TAPE

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

ZONE 2

! VSX-1021 only: If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the

receiver’s HDMI IN 1 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 16 ).

Select one

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

IN1IN

)

DVD

ASSIGNABLE

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

(

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.

Select one

AUDIO IN

R L

ANALOG

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

DVD ININ

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

CD-R/TAPE

DVR/BDR IN

DVD INBD IN

ZONE 2

! If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the

recorder.

! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD

inputs instead.

AUDIO OUT

R L

ANALOG

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R L

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

)

IN1IN

DVD

)

SURROUND

(CD)(

SPEAKERS

IN1IN

)

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

Page 19

Connecting your equipment

Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 19 ).

a b c

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).

! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a

wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.

75 Ω coaxial cable

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna. For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

Outdoor antenna

Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire)

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

5 m to 6 m

AM LOOP

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to two independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections. Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zone have independent power (the main zone power can be off while sub zone is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.

Important

VSX-921 model cannot connect the TV monitor for sub zone.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for the sub zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 19 for the sub zone.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2:

In case of VSX-1021

Sub Zone Input functions available

DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/

ZONE 2

It is not possible to down-convert the audio and video input signals from the HDMI input terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals and output them to ZONE 2.

USB, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio, composite video.)

In case of VSX-921

Sub Zone Input functions available

DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO 1,

ZONE 2

VIDEO 2, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT

(Output analog audio only.)

It is not possible to down-convert the audio input signal from the HDMI input terminals or digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) and output them to ZONE 2.

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 VSX-1021 only: Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

R L

VSX-1021 only

Main zone

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

INININ

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

DVR/BDR I

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting on page 62 to use this setup.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

FM 75

Page 20

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

R L RR

( Single

)

(CD)(

DVD

) (

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

COAXIAL

SPEAKERS

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

FRONT HEIG

HDMI

VIDEO

CONTROL

COMPONENT VI

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

ZONE 2

DVR/ BDR

OUT

Y P

ASSIGN ABLE

MONITOR OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

03 Connecting your equipment

2 VSX-1021 only: Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VSX-1021 only

VIDEO IN

Main zone

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand. When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the network, including your computer, using HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs.

(

)

10/100

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

FRONT CENTER

R L

LAN

)

Internet

Modem

LAN

3 2 1

WAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

TENNA

UNBAL

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

OUT

Router

LAN cable (sold separately)

to LAN port

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher). Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Network Setup menu on page 64 .

LAN terminal specifications

! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Note

! Refer to the operation manual of the

equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment.

! When using a broadband Internet connection,

a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER

When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. ! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled

device must support A2DP profiles.

! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection

and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Bluetooth® ADAPTER

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

DVD IN

DVR/BDR IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

OUT

0.1 A MAX

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL

SUBWOOFER

T VIDEO DVD

PRE OUT

Important

! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth

ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact.

% Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT.

! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth

wireless technology device, see Pairing the

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 31 .

LAN

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

)

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R L R

IN1IN

DVD

SURROUND

)

SPEAKERS

(CD)(

IN1IN

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2

(

)

Single

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

In case of VSX-1021

CONTROL ON / OFF

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPhone

HDMI 2 INPUT

iPod





5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPad

iPod





MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPod cable (supplied)

In case of VSX-921

CONTROL ON / OFF

MCACC

L AUDIO R VIDEO

SETUP MIC

iPhone

iPad

VIDEO 2 INPUT

iPod cable (supplied)

Page 21

Connecting your equipment

% Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! It is also possible to connect using the cable

included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver.

! For the cable connection, also refer to the

operating instructions for your iPod.

! For instructions on playing the iPod, see

Playing an iPod on page 27 .

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver. It is also possible to connect a USB keyboard (US-international layout) to the receiver to enter text in the following GUI screens. ! Change the input name in the Input Setup

menu (page 25).

! Add names to radio station presets (page 30).

CONTROL ON / OFF

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPhone

iPad

USB keyboard

HDMI 2 INPUT

USB mass storage device

% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! This receiver does not support a USB hub. ! For instructions on playing the USB device,

see Playing a USB device on page 28 .

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input

VSX-1021 only

CONTROL ON / OFF

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

MCACC

SETUP MIC

Video camera (etc.)

iPhone

iPad

HDMI 2 INPUT

Connecting to the front panel video terminal

VSX-921 only

Front VIDEO 2 connections are accessed via the front panel using the INPUT SELECTOR or INPUT SELECT c/d button on the remote control. There are standard audio/video jacks. Hook them up the same way you made the rear panel connections.

CONTROL ON / OFF

MCACC

SETUP MIC

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

L VIDEO

AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

iPhone

iPad

Video camera

(etc.)

Connecting to a wireless LAN

Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the separately sold AS-WL300 for connection. ! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN

converter, see Network Setup menu on page 64 .

ASSIGNABL

(

)

10/100

COAXIAL

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

TENNA

NBAL

SUBWOOFER

RE OUT

OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER

R L R

IN1IN

)

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUN

SPE

DC 5V WPS

Ethernet

Internet

Modem

Router

WAN

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver. ! Remote operation may not be possible if direct

light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

! Note that other manufacturers may not use

the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

! If using two remote controls (at the same

time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

Page 22

HDMI

VIDEO

CONTROL

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO IN

TV/SAT

ZONE 2

DVR/BDR

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

DVR/ BDR

OUT

DVD ININ

INININ

OUT OUT

VIDEO

DVD INBD IN

DVR/BDR IN

FM UNBAL 75

FRONT C

R L

AM LOOP

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

LAN

AUDIO

PRE OUT

ANTENNA

ASSIGN ABLE

OUT

MONITOR OUT

SUBWOOFER

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

03 Connecting your equipment

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Closet or shelving unit

Pioneer component

CONTROL

IN OUT

Non-Pioneer component

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

IR receiver

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

! If you want to link a Pioneer component to

the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 22 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

(

OUTPUT 5 V 0.6 A MAX

ADAPTER PORT

)

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

VIDEO IN

HDMI

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components

together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed

CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVR/ BDR

OUT

(

)

DVD

ASSIGN ABLE

(

DVR/

)

BDR

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

TV/SAT

along the chain to the appropriate component.

)

! If you want to control all your components

using this receiver’s remote control, see page

AUDIO

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

OUT OUT

DVD ININ

TV/SAT VIDEO DVDY PBP

IN OUT

CONTROL

DVR/BD

DVD INBD IN

CD-R/TAPE

ZONE 2

IN OUT

CONTROL

50.

! If you have connected a remote control to the

CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.

! Do not use any power cord other than the one

supplied with this unit.

! Do not use the supplied power cord for any

purpose other than that described below.

! The receiver should be disconnected by

removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

! After this receiver is connected to an AC

outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

Important

! Note that if you use this feature, make sure

that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to

another component for grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

CAUTION

! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do

not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 41 .

are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

Page 23

Basic Setup

Changing the TV format setting

If the Graphical User Interface screen is not displayed correctly, it may be that the TV system is set incorrectly for your country or region.

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Use TUNE i/j to select PAL/NTSC c PAL d, and then use PRESET k/l to select PAL or NTSC.

Changing the frequency step

If you find that you can’t tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. Here’s how to switch the setting:

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Use TUNE i/j to select FREQ STEP c 9k d, and then use PRESET k/l to select 9k or 10k.

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed. ! The explanations in these operating

instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.

5 Select the desired language. 6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room.

Important

! Make sure the microphone and speakers are

not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will

overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the

headphones should be disconnected.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC

Setup are output at high volume.

THX

! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

CONTROL ON / OFF

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPhone

iPad

HDMI 2 INPUT

Microphone

Tripod

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone. Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible:

! Sofas or other soft surfaces. ! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Speaker System : Normal(SB/FH EQ Type : SYMMETRY MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 THX Speaker : NO

START

)

Exit Retur n

Page 24

04 Basic Setup

! If you leave the GUI screen for over five

minutes, the screen saver will appear.

3 Select the parameters you want to set.

! When data measurement is taken, the

reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

! When measurement is taken of the reverb

characteristics data other than SYMMETRY, the data are not measured after the correction. If you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the

Manual MCACC setup (page 58). If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 62 .

! Speaker System – Shows the current

settings. When this is selected and ENTER is

pressed, the speaker system selection screen

appears. Select the proper speaker system,

then press RETURN to return.

If you are planning on bi-amping your front

speakers, or setting up a separate speaker

system in another room, read through

Speaker system setting on page 62 and make

sure to connect your speakers as necessary

before continuing to step 4.

! EQ Type – This determines how the

frequency balance is adjusted.

! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used

for storing surround sound settings for

different listening positions. Simply choose

an unused preset for now (you can rename it

later in Data Management on page 61 ).

! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX

speakers (all speakers other than the front

speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases,

leave at NO.

4 Press then select START.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 7.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 24 ) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

Now Analyzin g... 2/9

Environmen t Check

Exit Cancel

A/V RECEIVER

Ambient No ise : OK Microphone : Speaker YES /NO :

1a.Full Auto MCACC

L : YES FHL : YES C : YES FHR : YES R : YES SR : YE S SBR : Y ES SBL : YES SL : YES SW : YES

OK RETRY

Exit Cancel

A/V RECEIVER

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

configuration displayed isn’t correct),

there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings. Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup. The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The

Advanced MCACC menu on page 56 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page

62 .

! Depending on the characteristics of your

room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 62 .

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement

results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them. ! Some older TVs may interfere with the

operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

Page 25

Basic Setup

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 25 ). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4.System Setup

a.Ma nual SP S etup

b. Inpu t Set up

c. OSD Lang uage

d. Netw ork S etup

e. HDMI Set up

f. Othe r Set up

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

A/V RECEIVER

4b.Input Setup

Input : DVD

Input Name : Rename Input Skip : OFF

Digital In : COA X-1

Exit R eturn

HDMI Input : DVD Component In : In -1

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Finish

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.

6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

! Input Name – You can choose to rename the

input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input

is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on page 25 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.

Input

function

DVD

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

VIDEO 1

<c>

VIDEO 2

<c>

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

iPod/USB

CD-R/TAPE

TUNER

ADAPTER

PORT

a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments

cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on

page 41 ). b VSX-1021 only c VSX-921 only

Input Terminals

HDMI Digital Component

(BD)

COAX-1 IN 1

(DVD)

<a, b>

(DVR/BDR)

(VIDEO)

(VIDEO 1)

IN 1

(HDMI 2)

OPT-1

OPT-2 IN 2

COAX-2

Operation Mode Setup

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings. One of two settings can be selected for the

Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want.

! Expert (default) – Users can set all the

functions by themselves.

! Basic – The number of operable functions is

restricted, and functions whose operations are restricted are automatically set to achieve the Pioneer-recommended sound and picture quality. The functions that can be operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.

Operable functions/ items

HOME MENU

Full Auto MCACC

Input Name

Input Skip

Software Update

Descriptions Page

Makes high precision sound field settings easily.

Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.

Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).

Updates to the latest version of the software.

Page 26

04 Basic Setup

Operable functions/ items

Network Information

Pairing Bluetooth Setup

Audio Parameters

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

V.SB

(Virtual Surround Back)

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual Height)

Other functions

INPUT SELECT (INPUT SELECTOR)

MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE

LISTENING MODE

PQLS

Descriptions Page

Checks the receiver’s IP address.

Pairs with a Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or AS-BT200.

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory.

Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.

Plays compressed sound with high sound quality. 44

Dual monaural audio setting.

Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.

Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.

Switches the input. 27

Use to set the listening volume.

Only Pioneer-recommended modes can be selected.

Plays using the PQLS function.

Operable functions/

Descriptions Page

items

PHASE CTRL (Phase Control)

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.

Switches the input to iPod/ USB and sets the mode allowing operation from the iPod.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

Page 27

Basic playback

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver (press u RECEIVER). Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

! If you need to manually switch the input

signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 34).

3 Press to the receiver operation mode.

4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound source, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

! You may need to check the digital audio

output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

! See also Listening to your system on page 33

for information on different ways of listening

to sources. It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed properly. For details, see Auto

Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 80 .

When using a surround back speaker, 2DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals. If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Playing a source with HDMI connection

% Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.

You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio

options on page 44 to THROUGH if you want

to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

! If the video signal does not appear on your

Playing an iPod

This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver. ! This receiver is compatible with the audio

and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone and iPad. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The receiver is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

! This receiver has been developed and tested

for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad indicated on the website of Pioneer (http:// pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/ao/).

! Installing software versions other than

indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility with this receiver.

! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for

reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

! Features such as the equalizer cannot

be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances

accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

! When listening to a track on the iPod in the

main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an iPod on page 20 .

! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the

iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see Switching the iPod controls on page 28 .

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen while the

receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod. When the display shows the iPod Top menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable

when connected to this receiver.

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver. You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver. ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed

on this receiver are displayed as #.

! This feature is not available for photos on your

iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 28 ).

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the iPod Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

Page 28

05 Basic playback

3 Use i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.

4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

Note

! You can play all of the songs in a particular

category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod. ! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME

iPod CTRL

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

PARAMETER

RETURN

VIDEO

T.EDIT

PRESET

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

PGM

PHASE

54 6

CTRL STATUS

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to

switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal f Slower.

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver. ! You cannot use this function, when an

iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.

1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Note

! Change the receiver’s input to the

iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.

Playing a USB device

It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver. ! Compatible USB devices include external

magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.

! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility

(operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting a USB device on page 21 .

! Make sure the receiver is in standby when

disconnecting the USB device.

2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen as this

receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected. When the display shows the USB Top menu you’re ready to play from the USB device.

Note

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below:

! Switch the receiver off, then on again. ! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver

switched off.

! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the

device) for USB power. If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory device. ! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist

are displayed as #.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.

! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

PARAMETER

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNE

VIDEO

T.EDIT

PRESET

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

PGM

PHASE

54 6

CTRL STATUS

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts. After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between play and pause (only when

Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).

! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for

five minutes, the list screen reappears.

Basic playback controls

Button(s) What it does

ENTER, d

RETURN, k

<a>

Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.

Displays the previous photo content.

Page 29

Basic playback

Button(s) What it does

<a>

DISP

<a>

a You can only use this button when Theme on the

Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).

Displays the next photo content.

Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.

Displays the photo information.

Slideshow Setup

Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Select the setting you want.

! Theme – Add various effects to the

slideshow.

! Interval – Set the interval for switching the

photos. This may not be available depending on the Theme setting.

! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB

device while displaying photos.

! Music Select – Select the folder containing

the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the USB Top menu.

About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3 <a>

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-

ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

.mp3

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio

Layer-3

WMA8/9

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit

Channel 2 ch, Monaural Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Photo files

Category Extension

Meeting the following conditions: ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF

format)

! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

JPEG

.jpg

.jpeg

.jpe

.jif

.jfif

Format

Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

Page 30

05 Basic playback

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see Saving station presets on page 30 for more on how to do this.

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary. 3 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

! Automatic tuning – To search for stations

in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.

! Manual tuning – To change the frequency

one step at a time, press TUNE i/j.

! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE

i/j for high speed tuning. Release the

button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using Neural Surround

This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.

! While listening to FM radio, press

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround.

! The Neural Surround mode can be selected

also with STANDARD.

Tuning directly to a station

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). 4 Use the number buttons to enter the

frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio on page 30 for more on this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Listening to station presets

1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which

the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

3 Press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

! You can also use the number buttons on the

remote control to recall the station preset.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets on page 30 for how to do this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Note

! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1

to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

! Once you have named a station preset, you

can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music

Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology:

Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device: cell phone

Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: Digital music player

Music data

This receiver

ADVANCED

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

MCACC

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

PHONES

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

SOUND

ADVANCED

STANDARD

AUTO SURR/ALC/

iPod iPhone iPad

CONTROL

RETRIEVER AIR

SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

DIRECT

PUSH OPEN

Remote control operation

Wireless music play

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports

Digital music player + Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold commercially)

Bluetooth

ADAPTER

MASTER VOLUME

Page 31

Basic playback

SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type Bluetooth wireless technology.

! With the AS-BT100, some functions may not

be available on this receiver.

Remote control operation

The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations. ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.

! Remote control operations cannot be

guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared. The pairing step is necessary to register the

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details,

see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device. ! Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing

should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s

security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on

the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit

complies with Bluetooth Specifications Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver.

2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password. In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then select YES with the k and l keys and press ENTER. After this, also perform the connection operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, then try starting over. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! Pair one unit at a time. ! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth

connections with a device equipped with the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth- equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, disconnect the other device before connecting this receiver.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then

press ENTER. 5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.

Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth wireless technology device you wish to connect.

! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from

these options. These are the passcodes that can be used in most cases.

! Others – Select to use a passcode other than

those mentioned above.

6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter the passcode.

Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.

8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected:

CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.

! The system can display alphanumeric

characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected:

Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In this case, perform the connection operation from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5.

! The passcode may in some cases be referred

to as PASSKEY or PIN code.

Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system

1 Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged

into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected.

2 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.

3 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless technology devices.

! Bluetooth wireless technology device should

be compatible with AVRCP profile.

! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless

technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.

PGM

HDD DVD

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

TV / DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 322

AUDIO

Page 32

05 Basic playback

4 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Page 33

Listening to your system

Important

! The listening modes and many features

described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

% While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis-

play before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed. ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural

Surround feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural Surround on page 30 for more on this).

! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT

input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is

selected automatically. ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Note

! When ALC is selected, the effect level can

be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Listening in surround sound

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.

% While listening to a source, press STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode. ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! If the surround back speakers are not

connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2

Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). With two channel sources, you can select from: ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

movie sources ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

music sources ! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to

video games ! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound

(sound from the surround speakers is mono) ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (front height)

! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1

channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to movie sources

! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround

back), especially suited to music sources

! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to music sources

! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound

settings and you can still use the audio options.

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can select (according to format):

! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back

channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

! DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback with DTS-ES encoded sources

! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback with DTS encoded sources

! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel

playback

! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above ! STEREO – See above ! Straight Decode – Plays back without the

effects above.

Note

! When listening sources in 2

Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also

adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 44 ).

! When listening to 2-channel sources in

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 44 to adjust them.

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6

Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 44 ).

! Neural Surround can be selected for

2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel sources.

! The stereo mode can also be selected by

pressing the STEREO button on the remote control.

! When listening through headphones, you can

select STEREO mode only.

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.

% Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! ACTION – Designed for action movies with

dynamic soundtracks

! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of

dialog

! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots

of special effects

! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from

mono soundtracks

Page 34

06 Listening to your system

! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources ! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo

field

! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound

for both mono and stereo TV sources

! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video

games

! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs ! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type

sound

! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for

rock and/or pop music

! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music

sources

! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a

stereo source, using all of your speakers

! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich

surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround

sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

FOCUS position (Recommended)

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

WIDE position

Front left speaker

! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for

listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input or listening through headphones.

! PHONES SURR – When listening through

headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

Front right speaker

Note

! When an Advanced Surround listening mode

is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,

F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR, the effect level cannot be adjusted.

! The Front Stage Surround Advance

(F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE) function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want

to hear the truest possible reproduction of a

source. All unnecessary signal processing is

bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog

or digital sound source.

Processing differs depending on the input sig-

nal and whether or not surround back speakers

are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,

ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal

formats on page 80 .

% While listening to a source,

press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT

(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to

select the mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front

panel display to see how the source is being

processed.

! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on

page 33 .

! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode

(page 33).

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the

source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by

the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.

! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified

sound from source with only minimal digital treatment. No sound is output from the Speaker B in this mode.

Note

! When listening through headphones, you can

select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.

Selecting MCACC presets

! Default setting: MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press MCACC.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 61 to check and manage your current settings.

! These settings have no effect when

headphones are connected.

! You can also press k/l to select the

MCACC preset.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below. ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,

PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTSEXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.

! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,

DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 14) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.

! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.

For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

! AUTO – The receiver selects the first

available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.

! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal. ! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial

digital signal.

! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter

is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this

receiver. When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded (see Display on page 8 ).

Page 35

Listening to your system

Better sound using Phase Control

This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound. Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Note

! Phase matching is a very important factor

in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available

even when the headphones are plugged in.

! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,

set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your

subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you

may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to

ON in the following cases:

— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched

on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is

set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Page 36

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery

This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the setup and playback procedures required to enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component. ! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

! Photo or video files cannot be played back. ! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Player 12, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

Features of Home Media Gallery

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

1 Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 37 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 37 .

! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio

files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

2 Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 37 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 37 .

Introduction

About playable DLNA network devices

The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following: ! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP

with Windows Media Player 11 installed

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with

Windows Media Player 12 installed

! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on

PCs or other components) Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this

DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE and DISP). ! Depending on the external controller being

used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes

This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1 The receiver’s input will switch automatically to Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2 The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode: ! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod

touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.

! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and

shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver.

! Display of the currently playing track

information on the receiver’s display,

including artist, song and album name. *1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com). *2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON.

Note

! A network environment is required to use

AirPlay.

! The receiver’s name that shows up in the

AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name from Network Setup.

! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been

developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website.

About the DHCP server function

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup menu on page 64 for more on this.

Authorizing this receiver

In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

Page 37

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Playback with Home Media Gallery

Important

! When you play back audio files,

‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

! In case a domain is configured in a Windows

network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

! There are cases where the time elapsed may

not be correctly displayed.

1 Press HMG to select Home Media Gallery as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen appears when the Home Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The number next to

indicates the number of connected servers.

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Inte rnet Radi o

*** ***

Favo rite s Rece ntly Play ed Setu p

1/5

! The server without the mark cannot be

accessed.

2 Use i/j to select the category you want to play back, and then press ENTER.

Select a category from the following list:

! Internet Radio – Internet radio ! Server Name – Server components on the

network

! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being

registered

! Recently played – Internet Radio listening

history (most recent 20 incidents) Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

3 Use i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then press ENTER.

Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN. When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed. Only audio files with the In case of the folders with the

mark can be played.

mark, use i/j and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

4 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

! Internet radio stations – See Listening to

Internet radio stations on page 37 .

! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on

components on the network on page 37 .

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the

HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

PRESET

RETURN

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

PGM

PHASE

54 6

CTRL STATUS

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

Listening to Internet radio stations

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region. Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.

About list of Internet radio

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 82 .

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on page 38 for more on this. ! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

! The port number varies depending on the

Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.

! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the

vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted

depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 37 .

2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.

Page 38

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of this address. The following can be checked on the Help screen:

! Get access code – The access code required

for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering

on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the

information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

Playing back your favorite songs

You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder

Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped. The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder. Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered. To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder, select the song you want to delete from the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the Favorites folder.

Advanced operations for Internet radio

Saving Internet radio stations

This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity.

1 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save.

Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following Steps 1 to 3 on page 37.

2 Press T.EDIT to switch to the stationsaving mode.

3 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in.

Select the desired class from A to G.

4 Use i/j to select the number that you want to save the station as, and then press ENTER.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations

You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations on page 38 and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps.

1 Select the class that you want to retrieve an Internet radio station from.

Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A to G in turn.

2 Use i/j to select the station number that you want to retrieve.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. ‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved.

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Player 12 on page 82 for more

on this.

Windows Media DRM

Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management (WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM.

Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including

copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

DLNA

DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home. The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

Page 39

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

Content playable over a network

! Even when encoded in a compatible format,

some files may not play correctly.

! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back. ! There are cases where you cannot listen to an

Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

! Some functions may not be supported

depending on the server type or version used.

! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,

files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit. For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

Disclaimer for Third Party Content

Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account registration and a paid subscription. Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice, and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences. Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.

About playback behavior over a network

! Playback may stall when the PC is switched

off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

! If there are problems within the network

environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or

stalled). For best performance, a 100BASETX connection between player and PC is recommended.

! If several clients are playing simultaneously,

as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

! Depending on the security software installed

on a connected PC and the setting of such

software, network connection may be blocked. Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.

“Windows Media

” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

Microsoft

, Windows®7, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000, Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

About playable file formats

The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server. ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this

case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3 <a>

LPCM

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

.mp3

—

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

LPCM

WMA2/7/8

WMA9

Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit Channel 2 ch

In case of VSX-1021

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit Channel 2 ch Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

8 kHz to 192 kHz

In case of VSX-921

8 kHz to 96 kHz

Page 40

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Category Extension Stream

.m4a

AAC

FLAC .flac FLAC

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

.aac .3gp .3g2

MPEG-4 AAC LC MPEG-4 HE AAC (aacPlus v1/2)

Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps VBR/CBR Supported/Supported Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 96 kHz Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate — VBR/CBR —

Page 41

Control with HDMI function

About the Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. ! The receiver’s volume can be set and the

sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over

automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,

when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Important

! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI

functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.

! You cannot use this function with components

that do not support Control with HDMI.

! We only guarantee this receiver will work

with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components and components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function. However, we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function.

! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you

want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.

! For details about concrete operations,

settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each component.

Making Control with HDMI connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and up to six (VSX-1021)/four (VSX-

921) other components. ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to

the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on

page 41 ). For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 16 .

Important

! When connecting this system or changing

connections, be sure to switch the power off

and disconnect the power cord from the wall

socket. After completing all connections,

connect the power cords to the wall socket. ! After this receiver is connected to an AC

outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI

initialization process begins. You cannot carry

out any operations during this process. The

HDMI indicator in the front panel display

blinks during this process, and you can turn

on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,

you can skip this process. For details about the

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with

HDMI function on page 41 .

! To get the most out of this function, we

recommend that you connect your HDMI

component not to a TV but rather directly to

the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

HDMI Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMIcompatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function. When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.

! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI

function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video outputs from the HDMI connection are output from the TV.

! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.

Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.

5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.

Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked functions or the PQLS function only. However, Display Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 6 below.

! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions. ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.

When PQLS is selected, link functions other than the PQLS function may not work

properly. If you wish to use all link functions, select ALL.

6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.

If the TV’s power is turned off while using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power off function). This function can be disabled.

! YES – The all power off function is enabled.

The receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power. This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.

! NO – The all power off function is disabled.

The receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power is turned off.

7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.

It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMIconnected player to the TV when this receiver’s power is on standby as long as Control is ON, but the amount of energy consumed rises. It is, however, possible to minimize energy consumption when power is set to standby.

! Normal – Regular setting. Power-up time

from standby is short.

! Eco – Conserves energy while standby.

Power-up time is longer than when set to

Normal.

8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the

Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.

! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the

HDMI terminal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON.

9 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.

Page 42

08 Control with HDMI function

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode. 2 Turn the power on for all components,

with the power for the TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

About synchronized operations

The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below. ! From the menu screen of the Control with

HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver, and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, you

can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When the synchronized amp mode is

canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.

! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the TV’s input is switched.

! The synchronized amp mode remains in

effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by

HDMI. The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs. ! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the

sound is muted, the volume status is displayed

on the TV’s screen. ! When the OSD language is switched on

the TV, the receiver’s language setting also

switches accordingly.

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a TV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of the Control with HDMI functions may not work.) ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only

when the input for a component connected to

the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or

when watching the TV)

! The sound of TV programs or an external

input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver. (If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, this requires connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in

addition to the HDMI cable.) The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. ! When playback starts on the player or

recorder, the receiver’s input switches to

the HDMI input to which that component is

connected. See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support the Control with HDMI function.

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission. ! VSX-1021 only: On players compatible with

PQLS Bit-stream, PQLS always works for all

sources. ! On players compatible with PQLS Multi

Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the

player’s audio output to Linear PCM. ! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,

PQLS only works when playing CDs. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information. This function is activated when Control is set to ON.

! If a listening mode other than

AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected while

the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is disabled.

! When this receiver is connected by HDMI

cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected.

% Press on the remote control, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display. ! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision

quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLScompatible players.

! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function

! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc

player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

Page 43

! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input

in The Input Setup menu on page 25 is automatically set to OFF.

! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,

even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI- compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.

Control with HDMI function

Page 44

09 Using other functions

Using other functions

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the

current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER. 2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Audio parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

(Acoustic Calibration EQ)

S-WAVE

(Standing Wave)

Phase C+

(Phase Control Plus)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs.

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6. MEMORY 6 d Default: M1. MEMORY 1

OFF

c 0 to 16 (ms) d Default: 6ms

c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d

1 second = 25 frames (PAL) / 30 frames (NTSC)

Default: 0.0

Setting What it does Option(s)

BYPASS

c –6 to +6 (dB) d Default: 0 (dB)

OFF

c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/ UP4 d Default: OFF

CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only

CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only

CH1 CH2 – Both channels heard from front speakers

OFF

AUTO

MAX MID OFF

TONE

(Tone Control)

BASS

<a>

TREBLE

<a>

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)

DNR

(Digital Noise Reduction)

DIALOG E

(Dialog Enhancement) <c>

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

Fixed PCM

DRC

(Dynamic Range Control) <d>

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely. This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is STEREO, Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation. When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound quality.

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on. This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards.

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance. When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

Page 45

Using other functions

Setting What it does Option(s)

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass

LFE

(LFE Attenuate)

SACD GAIN

<e>

HDMI

(HDMI Audio) <f>

A.DELAY

(Auto delay) <g>

C.WIDTH

(Center Width) (Applicable only when using a center speaker) <h>

DIMENSION

<h>

PANORAMA

<h>

C.IMAGE

(Center Image) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)

EFFECT

tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ –10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d Default: 0dB

0dB

+6dB

AMP

THROUGH

OFF

c 0 to 7 d Default: 3

c –3 to +3 d Default: 0

OFF

c 0 to 10 d Defaults: Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

c 10 to 90 d Defaults: EXT.STEREO: 90 Others: 50

Setting What it does Option(s)

H.GAIN

(Height Gain)

V.SB (Virtual Surround Back) <j>

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual Height) <k>

a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON. b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to

ON.

c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of

effects depends on the listening mode.

d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than

Dolby TrueHD.

e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch

the gain setting back to 0dB.

f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations. ! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input

signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page 42 .

g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing

capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode. j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when

any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set

to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.

k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the

stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It

can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.

Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized.

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

LOW

MID

HIGH

OFF

Page 46

09 Using other functions

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to

the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

! All of the setting items can be set for each input function. ! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER. 2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Video parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

V.CONV

(Digital Video Converter) <a>

RES

(Resolution)

PCINEMA

(PureCinema) <c>

P.MOTION

(Progressive Motion) <c>

Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 14).

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).

This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON or OFF.

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

OFF

AUTO

PURE 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p

AUTO

OFF

c –4 to +4 d Default: 0

Setting What it does Option(s)

V.ADJ

(Advanced Video Adjust)

YNR

<d, e>

DETAIL

<d, e>

SHARP

(Sharpness) <d, f>

BRIGHT

(Brightness) <d, f>

CONTRAST

<d, f>

HUE

<d, f>

CHROMA

(Chroma Level) <d, f>

BLK SETUP

(Black Setup) <g>

ASP

(Aspect) <h>

a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF. b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some

cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting. ! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)

connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input

(see About the video converter on page 14 ). ! If this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are

output from the component output terminals. ! The default is PURE when HDMI input is selected. c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output. ! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON. ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i or 576i analog video signals

d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.

Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.

Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.

Adjusts the overall brightness.

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

Adjusts the red/green balance.

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

Sets the black level according to the video input signal. Normally select 0. If the black level is too bright due to the combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5.

Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

PDP

LCD FPJ PRO MEMORY c 0 to +8 d

Default: 0 c –4 to +4 d

Default: 0

c 0 to +8 d Default: 0

c –6 to +6 d Default: 0

7.5

THROUGH

NORMAL

Page 47

Using other functions

e ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i or 576i analog video signals

f ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals

g This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks. h ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the

monitor.

! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.

Switching the speaker terminals

If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker

system setting on page 62 , you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.

% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.

As mentioned above, if you have selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:

When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height

channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front height channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are

added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels

(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select from:

! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide

channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are

added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select Speaker B, you can select from:

! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back channels), depending on the source).

! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two

speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels,

depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

Note

! The subwoofer output depends on the settings

you made in Manual speaker setup on page 62 . However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

! All speaker systems (except

Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on page 47 .

1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.

Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:

! ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE

feature on

! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-

ZONE feature off The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

! When the receiver is on, make sure that any

operations for the sub zone are done while

ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is not

showing, the front panel controls affect the

main zone only.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the sub zone.

For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected to the CD-R/TAPE inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2) .

! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner

controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on page 30 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2, use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.

5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.

! You won’t be able to switch the main zone

off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE

feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate the ZONE 2. The following table shows the possible MULTIZONE remote controls:

Button(s) What it does

INPUT SELECT

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Page 48

09 Using other functions

Button(s) What it does

Input function buttons

MASTER VOLUME +/–

<a>

MUTE

<a>

a You can only use this button when Speaker System

is set to ZONE 2.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV). Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 10 for more on connections). ! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the

tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and

can only be recorded in analog.

! Some video sources are copy-protected. These

cannot be recorded. Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to

record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video.

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or

INPUT SELECT).

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.

Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.

4 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels. Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

5 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound. The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

! You can check the remaining sleep time at

any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If

any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

% Press to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

! You can also choose to turn the display off. In

this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.

1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system settings.

The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each: Input

Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC preset d ZONE 2 input.

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF. ! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device

from the receiver beforehand.

! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI

Setup on page 41 ).

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 2 While holding down ENTER on the

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the

receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the

receiver is unplugged.

Page 49

Using other functions

Default system settings

Setting Default

Digital Video Converter ON SPEAKERS SB/FH

Speaker System

Front SMALL Center SMALL

Speaker Setting

Surround Position IN REAR Crossover 80 Hz X-Curve OFF DIMMER Brightest

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 25 .

HDMI

HDMI Audio Amp Control ON Control Mode ALL Display Power Off YES

Audio playback

Power On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Phase Control ON

Auto Sound Retriever

Sound Delay 0.0 frame

FH/FW SMALL Surr SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES

iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, ADAPTER PORT input function

Other input functions

Normal (SB/FH)

OFF

Setting Default

Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safety OFF

Effect Level

2 PL II Music Options

Neo:6 Options Center Image

2 PL IIz Options

All Inputs

See also Setting the Audio options on page 44 for other default DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory

Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 3.00 m

Standing Wave (M1 to M6)

EQ Data (M1 to M6)

ExtendedStereo 90 Other modes 50 Center Width 3 Dimension 0 Panorama OFF

Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 Neo:6

MUSIC: 3 Height Gain MID Listening Mode

(2 ch/multi ch) Listening Mode

(Headphones)

ATT of all channels/filters

SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB All channels/

bands EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB

AUTO

SURROUND

STEREO

M1:

MEMORY 1

0.0 dB

Page 50

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling the rest of your system

About the Remote Setup menu

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting What it does

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control

Preset recall

Code learning

Multi operation

System off

codes of a number of other devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 50 .

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 51 .

A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions. See Multi Opera- tion and System Off on page 52 .

This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 52 .

Setting What it does

This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s input,

Direct function

Erase learning

Reset function

All reset

Change RC mode

when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 51 .

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 51 .

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Erasing all learnt set- tings that are in one input function on page 51 .

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 53 .

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 50 .

Note

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by

pressing RCU SETUP.

! After one minute of inactivity, the remote

automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receivers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting. ! Set the remote modes on the receivers before

using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 66 ).

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘4’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to operate.

For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’. If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote. However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming sig- nals from other remote controls on page 51 ). ! For greater convenience, assign the TV

connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/ cable receiver or set-top box connected to the TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.

! Devices may be assigned to the following

input function buttons.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

USB

iPod

TUNER

INPUT SELECT

ADPTHMG

CDTV

TV CTRL

VIDEO

RECEIVER

ZONE2

Selecting preset codes directly

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV CTRL here. The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

Page 51

Controlling the rest of your system

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on page 86 . If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.

4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code. The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

PGM

PHASE

54 6

807 9

TOOLS

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

CTRL STATUS

DIMMER

CLASS

ENTER

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

PRESET

RETURN

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

MULTI OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

CD HMGTV

USB

iPod

TUNER

VIDEO

ZONE2

SELECT

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

INPUT

TV CONTROL

VOL

SOURCERECEIVER

TV CTRL

RECEIVER

MUTE

ADPT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

DIRECT

LISTENING MODE

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.

! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

This receiver’s remote control

Other remote control

4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means

the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 51 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

! Note that interference from TVs or other

devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

! Some commands from other remote controls

cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘7’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The LED flashes once.

3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons. 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing

mode.

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function

This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input function, and restores the factory default. This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Direct function

! Default setting: On You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let

Page 52

10 Controlling the rest of your system

you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player. When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the direct function mode.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. ! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices

or perform programming signals for other remote controls before multi operation memory programming (page 51).

The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the following operations by pressing just two buttons. Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input function button to:

1. Switch this receiver on.

2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.

3. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands. Similar to Multi operations, System off allows you to use two buttons to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. Only one System off operation sequence may be programmed. Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE to:

1. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands.

2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs). For greater convenience, program this receiver to perform power on/off and playback operations on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The signals for Pioneer devices described above are not contingent on programming for nonPioneer devices.) The buttons that can be programmed using Multi operation or System off are the same buttons as those that can be programmed for other remote controls (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 51 ).

Note

! Before Multi operation and System off will

work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 50 for more on this).

! Some units may take some time to power up,

in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

! Power on and off commands only work with

components that have a standby mode.

! Some remote controllers for other

manufacturers’ devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off. In some cases, even if this receiver is programmed to perform these commands, power to the nonPioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly. Program the receiver to perform these commands if the non-Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on/off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘3’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button (or u SOURCE button).

For Multi operations, press the input function you wish to program (for example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD).

! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL

settings cannot be made. For other settable input functions, see Setting the remote to

control other components on page 50 .

For System off, press the u SOURCE button.

The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.

3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

4 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

! You don’t need to program the receiver to

switch on or off. This is done automatically. With Pioneer components, you don’t need to program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders).

5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to five commands.

If you press RCU SETUP before programming is completed, commands programmed up to that point will be stored.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Using multi operations

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

Using System off

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the zones becomes off).

! In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no

DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

Page 53

Controlling the rest of your system

Erasing the settings for the multi-operation

This erases all the settings programmed in the remote control for the multi-operation.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘8’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button containing the program you want to cancel or the u SOURCE button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default. ! When preset codes are set, all the signals

learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Default preset codes

Input function button Preset code

DVD BD DVR/BDR HDMI TV/SAT CD VIDEO TV CTRL

2246 2248 2238 2247 0186 5066 1077 0186

Page 54

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 50 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select

the component.

! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the

TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR HDMI

SAT

USB

iPod

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

CDTV

TUNER

VIDEO

ZONE2

SELECT

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

VOL

PARAMETER

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

HOME

TUNE

PGM

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

TV CTRL

RECEIVER

MUTE

VIDEO

RETURN

AUDIO

ADPTHMG

T.EDIT

PRESET

INFO

DISP

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) TV

u SOURCE

Number buttons

!/CLR k (dot)

POWER ON/ OFF

numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics

TV (Monitor)

POWER ON/ OFF

BD/DVD

POWER ON/ OFF

KURO LINK CLEAR + —

ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST

TOOLS/ GUIDE/EPG

USER MENU

TOOLS <a>

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU — HOME MENU

RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN

HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green

(Yellow)

(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow

Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue

— — — AUTO SETUP — FREEZE — — — —

ANT

AV SELECTION

— SCREEN SIZE

d d d d

e e e e

g g g g

m m m m

n n n n

o o

p p

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —

OUTPUT

CH +/–

CH +/– CH +/–

RESOLUTION +/– <a>

a Controls for BD.

HDD/BDR/ DVR

POWER ON/ OFF

VCR

POWER ON/ OFF

SAT/ CATV

POWER ON/ OFF

GUIDE — GUIDE

—

i/j/k/l

DISPLAY/ INFO

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–

Page 55

Controlling the rest of your system

Audio/Video components

Button(s) LD

u SOURCE Number buttons numerics numerics numerics —

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

d d d d d

e e e e e

g g g g g

m m m m m

n n n n n

o o o o o

p p p p p

AUDIO

DISP

a Controls for MD. b Controls for SACD.

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

+10 >10/CLEAR

TOP MENU — —

—

ENTER — — —

—

RETURN — — —

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/ SACD

LEGATO LINK

— —

SACD SETUP

PURE AUDIO

TIME

MD/DAT TAPE

CLEAR <a>

OPEN/CLOSE <a>

—

— —

CLEAR

ENTER

MSc

MSd

e/g/m/n

TV (Projector)

Button(s) TV (Projector)

u SOURCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

AUDIO DISP CH +/–

POWER ON MOVIE STANDARD DYNAMIC USER1 USER2 USER3 COLOR+ SHARP+ GAMMA COLOR– SHARP–

EXIT

INFO

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

MENU HDMI1 HDMI2 COMP. VIDEO S-VIDEO BRIGHT– BRIGHT+

POWER OFF ASPECT CONTRAST+/–

Page 56

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence. This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 for a quick and effective

automatic surround setup.

! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 56 for a more detailed

MCACC setup.

! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker

settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 58 ).

! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors

occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 , you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

Important

! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not

moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

! The screen saver will automatically appear

after five minutes of inactivity.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 56 .

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.

! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL

(recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want. — When data measurement is taken (after

selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics data (both beforeand after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

— When measurement is performed

with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 58).

— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is

also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 59 for more on this.

— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

! EQ Type (only available when

the Auto MCACC Menu above is

EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how

the frequency balance is adjusted. After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels). If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.

! THX Speaker (only available when the

Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or

Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using

THX speakers (all speakers other than the

front speakers are set to SMALL). In other

cases, leave at NO.

! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available

when the Auto MCACC Menu above

is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to

measurements at the listening position,

you can use two more reference points for

which test tones will be analyzed for standing

waves. This is useful if you want to get a

balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating

positions in your listening area. Place the

microphone at the reference point indicated

on-screen and note that the last microphone

placement will be at your main listening

position:

Page 57

The Advanced MCACC menu

3rd reference point

2nd reference point

1 2

Main listening position

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

CONTROL ON / OFF

5V 2.1

iPod

USB

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPhone

iPad

HDMI 2 INPUT

Microphone

Tripod

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

! It may not be possible to measure correctly

if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen. 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to

finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

! Do not adjust the volume during the test

tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),

Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point

setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page

62). ! Depending on the characteristics of your

room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 62 .

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results

are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we

recommend adjusting the settings manually. You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the

MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 60 ).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu. Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

Page 58

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 . You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC

setup are output at high volume.

Important

! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent

setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.

! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to

connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver.

! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC

Setup on page 24 for notes regarding high

background noise levels and other possible interference.

! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and

turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 56 if you’re not already

at this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments

to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on page 58 ).

! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay

settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page 58 ).

! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant

low frequencies in your listening room (see

Standing Wave on page 58 ). The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 :

! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency

balance of your speaker system while

listening to test tones (see Acoustic

Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 ).

! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system

based on the direct sound coming

from the speakers and make detailed

settings according to your room’s reverb

characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 59 ).

Fine Channel Level

! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels) You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 62 .

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be

output.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Fine Speaker Distance

! Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers) For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 62 .

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to

make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting

the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from

other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly. Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Standing Wave

! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters) Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound

Page 59

The Advanced MCACC menu

waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets. ! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot

be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.

! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which

you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).

! TRIM (only available when the filter channel

above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter

parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/

bands)

Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 , you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Use i/j to select the channel. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.

! The OVER! indicator shows in the display

if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Note

! Changing the frequency curve of one channel

too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.

! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low

frequencies

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Low frequencies

High frequencies

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

! Type B: Reverb characteristics for

different channels

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Front L

Front R

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

! Reverb Measurement – Use this to

measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.

! Reverb View – You can check the reverb

measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel. — If the Reverb View procedure is

performed after the Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 or

Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.

! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the

time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View:

Page 60

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).

! EQ ON – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area. — The calibration corresponding to the

currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

— After auto calibration with EQ Type

: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with

EQ ON. When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 72 for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted. Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j to go back and forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note that the

markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.

! To specify the place where the MCACC

memory is to be stored, press MCACC to

select the MCACC memory you want to store. Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting. Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them. Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,

20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all

channels during calibration. When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 58 , you can

check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to check.

! Speaker Setting – Used to check the

settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 60 for more on this.

! Channel Level – Used to check the output

level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 60 for more on this.

! Speaker Distance – Used to check the

distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page 60 for more on this.

! Standing Wave – Used to check the

standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 61 for more on this.

! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check

the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 61 for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 62 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 63 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on page 63 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Page 61

The Advanced MCACC menu

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing Wave on page 58 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 59 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV). From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

! This can be done in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 , either of which you should have already completed.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC

presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on page 61 ).

! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from

one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data on page 61 ).

! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC

presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on page 61 ).

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 58 ), we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

! The settings made in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 23 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 .

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the setting you want to copy.

! All Data – Copies all the settings of the

selected MCACC preset memory.

! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel

level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Page 62

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

The System Setup and Other Setup

menus

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of

connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see Manual speaker setup on page 62 ).

! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve

connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display

language can be changed (see Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 23 ).

! Network Setup – Conducts the setup

necessary to connect this unit to the network

(see Network Setup menu on page 64 ).

! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver

with your Pioneer component supporting

Control with HDMI (page 41).

! Other Setup – Makes customized settings

to reflect how you are using the receiver (see

The Other Setup menu on page 66 ).

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers). These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 , it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 62 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Speaker System – Specifies how you are

using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker terminals (page 62).

! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and

number of speakers you’ve connected (page

62).

! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance

of your speaker system (page 63).

! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance

of your speakers from the listening position (page 63).

! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your

speaker system for movie soundtracks (page

64).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Speaker system setting

! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH) There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 62 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the speaker system setting.

! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home

theater use with front height speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home

theater use with front wide speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker

terminals to listen to stereo playback in

another room (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).

! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re

bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 13 ).

! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back

speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 47 ).

3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of

5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be. Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.

! ON SIDE – Select when the surround

speakers is positioned right beside you.

! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker

is positioned obliquely behind you.

4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed. You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.

Page 63

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all

speakers to SMALL.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers

reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker

reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

! FH – Select LARGE if your front height

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only

when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FH).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only

when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW).

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

! SB – Select the number of surround back

speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO. — If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp

(in Speaker system setting on page 62 ) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.

— If the surround speakers are set to

NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.

! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of

channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers). — If you have a subwoofer and like lots of

bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in

the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by

selecting SMALL for the front speakers. If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, surround, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

! This setting decides the cutoff between bass

sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

! With Full Auto MCACC setup

or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.

! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that

the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

The test tones will start.

2 Adjust the level of each channel using k/l.

Use i/j to switch speakers. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)

meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! You can change the channel levels by press

to the receiver operation mode, then press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the remote control.

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using k/l.

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in

0.01 m Increments.

Page 64

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! For best surround sound, make sure the

surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

Room size (

X-Curve (dB/oct)

! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be

flat and the X-Curve has no effect.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

≤36 ≤48 ≤ 60 ≤72 ≤300 ≤1000

)

–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0

Network Setup menu

Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/

Proxy of this receiver (page 64).

! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator

or iControlAV2 function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 65).

! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver

displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed (page 65).

! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network

functions (page 65).

! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the

wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP address settings (page 65).

For the wireless LAN converter, use the

separately sold AS-WL300.

IP address/Proxy setting

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need to set up the network manually. You must set up

the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings. It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component. ! In case you make changes to the network

configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

Primary DNS Server/ Secondary DNS Server

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS server address field.

Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’ field.

1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the DHCP setting you want.

When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps

3. Proceed with Step 4. If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address.

! The IP address determined by the Auto IP

function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.

3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server.

Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.

5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

6 Enter the port number of your proxy server.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/ Proxy setup.

Page 65

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Network Standby

This setting allows the AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.

! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2

function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2

function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode).

Friendly Name

1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.

If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Parental Lock

Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.

! Upon shipment from the factory, the

password is set to “0000”.

Important

When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is selected, the setting made here cannot be reflected. Set the input to something other than

HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this setting.

1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Input the password.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.

! OFF – Internet services are not restricted. ! ON – Internet services are restricted.

4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.

In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.

Wireless LAN Converter

This setting is required for connecting a wireless LAN converter to the receiver and using wireless network functions. For the wireless LAN converter, use the separately sold AS-WL300.

Access Point Setting

Make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter connected to the receiver and the access point. Connect the wireless LAN converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the “IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand (page 64). There are four way to make the settings for connecting to the access point, as shown below. ! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made

automatically simply by pressing the WPS buttons on the access point and wireless LAN converter, following the instructions displayed on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest way of making the settings, and is possible when the access point and wireless LAN converter are equipped with WPS buttons.

Network connection settings require

approximately 2 minutes from the time the

WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the settings are completed.

! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of

connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings are made by inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the receiver’s screen to the access point to which you want to connect.

! Search for Access Point – Display a list of

the SSIDs of connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings with the access point are made by setting the access point’s security protocol, security key and WEP default key (only when the access point’s security protocol is WEP).

! Manual Setting – Connection settings are

made by manually inputting the SSID, security protocol, security key and WEP default key of the access point to which you want to connect.

Note

! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access

point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN connection will not be possible even after the wireless LAN converter settings are completed. Change the setting of the access point’s SSID or security key to a character string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon).

! If it is not possible to connect to the access

point with the WPS (PBC) or WPS (PIN) connection settings, we recommend making the connection settings at Search for Access Point or Manual Setting.

WLAN IP Address

If the IP address of a device connected in the LAN other than the wireless LAN converter is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of the wireless LAN converter will be redundant, making connection to the access point impossible.

In this case, use this setting to set an IP address specific to the wireless LAN converter.

1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Make the wireless LAN converter settings as necessary.

When making the connection settings of the wireless LAN converter and access point, select “Access Point Setting” and make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter and access point following the instructions on the screen. If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and input the IP address.

Checking the Network Information

The setting status of the following networkrelated items can be checked. ! IP Address – Check the IP address of this

receiver.

! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of

this receiver.

! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 65 . ! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point

connected with the wireless LAN converter (only when a wireless LAN converter is connected).

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the Home Menu.

Display the setting status of the network-related items.

Page 66

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.

1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER. 4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn

off automatically when the receiver is not being used.

! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related

operations of this receiver (page 66).

! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this

receiver’s remote control mode (page 66).

! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way

the GUI screen looks (page 66).

! Software Update – Use to update the

receiver’s software and check the version.

! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device (page 31).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Auto Power Down

The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals

being input to the receiver. When using ZONE 2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed. Different times can be set for the main zone and ZONE 2.

1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.

! MAIN – The time can be selected from

among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.

! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from

among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

Volume Setup

You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

! LAST (default) – When the power is turned

on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

! “---” – When the power is turned on, the

volume is set to minimum level.

! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to

be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.

It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).

3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not

limited.

! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum

volume is limited to the value set here.

4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

! FULL (default) – No sound. ! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be

turned down to the level specified here.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Remote Control Mode Setup

! Default setting: 1 This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers on page 50 .

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Flicker Reduction Setup

! Default setting: OFF The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting. Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.

1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Software Update

Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB memory device. Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file. This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet. Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer

website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device, delete them.

Page 67

Important

! DO NOT unplug the power cord during

updating.

! When updating via the Internet, do not

disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device, do not disconnect the USB memory device.

1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the update procedure.

! Update via Internet – The receiver checks

whether updatable software is available via the Internet.

! Update via USB Memory – The receiver

checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.

“Accessing” is displayed and the update file

is checked. Wait a while.

3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.

If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are displayed. If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.

4 To update, select OK.

The updating screen appears and updating is performed.

! The power turns off automatically once

updating is completed.

Software Update messages

Status messages

NO UPDATE FILE

FILE ERROR

UPDATE ERROR 1 to UPDATE ERROR 7

Update via USB

UE11 UE22 UE33

Descriptions

No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root directory.

Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still occurs, try using a different USB memory device.

Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.

If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating starts automatically.

Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Page 68

13 Additional information

Additional information

Troubleshooting 1

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work. ! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the

power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

Power

Symptom Remedy

The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.

Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

Power cannot be turned off. (ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)

The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to switch the Zone 2 off.

Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Turn down the volume. Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on

page 58 . Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front

panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

Try switching the receiver off, then back on again. Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again. The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on.

Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Symptom Remedy

The receiver suddenly switches off or the FL OFF indicator blinks.

AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the display and the FL OFF indicator flash and the power turns off.

The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes.

There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on.)

Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on (see Installing the receiver on page 5 ).

Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again. The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue. Lower the volume level. The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a

Pioneer authorized independent service company.

No sound

Symptom Remedy

No sound is output when an input function is selected. No sound is output from the front speakers.

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).

Make sure the correct input function is selected. Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected. Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other

signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 44 ). Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your

equipment on page 10 ). Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers

on page 12 ). Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance

mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 33 ).

Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Set- ting on page 62 ).

Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ). Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 12 ).

Page 69

Additional information

Symptom Remedy

No sound from surround back speakers.

No sound from front height or front wide speakers.

No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume

No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 12 ).

Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 12 ). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B.

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).

Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ).

When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the front height or front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 12 ).

turned up. If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off. Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on

page 62 ). The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the

characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ). If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change

your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ).

Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on page 44 ).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 63 ). Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page

62 ). The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced

effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 33 ).

Symptom Remedy

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/ DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the Home Menu.

Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 34 ).

Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the digital output settings on the source component. If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not

turned down. Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs. Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD

or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On. If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not

turned down. If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the

Home Menu.

Other audio problems

Symptom Remedy

Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) is heard from receiver during playback.

Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.

Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD.

When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.

Can’t record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog

Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 47 ).

Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.

Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 19). Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna. Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluo-

rescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.

This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.

Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 34 ).

recording from an analog source. For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.

Page 70

13 Additional information

Symptom Remedy

Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers

Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.

The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.

Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.

Can’t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control.

There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.

The maximum volume available (shown in the front panel display) is lower than the +12dB maximum.

The volume level drops automatically.

to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 62 ). The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker

terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 12 ).

If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 63 ).

Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.

Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 66 ).

The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value. Try moving the unit for better ventilation (see Installing the receiver on page 5 ).

ADAPTER PORT terminal

Symptom Remedy

The Bluetooth wireless technology device cannot be connected or operated. Sound from the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not emitted or the sound is interrupted.

Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.

Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist between them.

Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected.

The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.

Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.

Video

Symptom Remedy

No image is output when an input is selected.

Check the video connections of the source component. For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another

component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Check the video output settings of the source component. Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct. Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not

be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ) to OFF.

Page 71

Additional information

Symptom Remedy

Can’t record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected.

The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.

Video signals are not output from the component terminal.

Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following: — Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal. — Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video options on page 46 ). — Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals. Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

Settings

Symptom Remedy

The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.

The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 24 ). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 62).

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.

To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:

— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue. — If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

Symptom Remedy

After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance setting properly.

The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings.

Most recent settings have been erased.

The various system settings are not stored.

Certain listening modes or HOME MENU items cannot be selected.

There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an airconditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.

Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 62 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 if this is a recurring problem.

Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.

The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting. Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones

before unplugging the power cord. Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings

will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)

When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode Setup on page 25 ).

Page 72

13 Additional information

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Symptom Remedy

The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat.

EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration.

Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers.

There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.

Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.

Display

Symptom Remedy

The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness. You can’t get DIGITAL to dis-

play when using SIGNAL SEL. 2 DIGITAL or DTS does not

light when playing Dolby/DTS software.

When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.

When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.

Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 25 ).

These indicators do not light if playback is paused. Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source com-

ponent. Check that the player is connected using a digital connection. Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input

signal on page 34 ). Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are

converted to PCM. Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or

DTS is selected. The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging

for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.

Symptom Remedy

When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround or ALC, 2 Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:6 appear on the receiver.

During playback of DVDAudio, the display shows PCM.

The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes, or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on.

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 34 ).

If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.

See the Power section (page 68).

Remote control

Symptom Remedy

Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the set-

Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.

ting on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 50 ). Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote

Control Mode Setup on page 66 ). Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on

page 5 ). Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the

front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 5 ). Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote con-

trol. Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the

remote sensor. Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer

components with this unit’s sensor on page 22 ). If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the

preset codes. The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset

codes. When commands from the remote control units of other devices are regis-

tered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning function (see page 51). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another remote control.

Page 73

Additional information

HDMI

Symptom Remedy

The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.

No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are con-

No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 46 ).

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.

Check all the points below.

necting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.

Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other setting for your component.

While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.

Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Audio options on page 44 ).

If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio. If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection

for the audio. Check the audio output settings of the source component. HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be rec-

ognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

Symptom Remedy

Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for

HDCP ERROR shows in the display.

Synchronized operation not possible using Control with HDMI function.

example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

Check the HDMI connections. The cable may be damaged. Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 41 ). Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page

41 ). Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power. Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instruc-

tions).

Page 74

13 Additional information

Troubleshooting 2

AVNavigator

Symptom Causes Remedy

AVNavigator cannot be installed.

AVNavigator does not interact well with the receiver.

An error message may appear if there are not enough system resources available.

Installation of AVNavigator may fail because of incompatibilities with other applications.

The receiver’s power is not turned on.

The receiver or computer is not connected to the LAN.

The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on.

AVNavigator’s network settings are not correct.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

When the operating instructions interactive mode is changed, the settings may not be transferred to the browser, causing AVNavigator to stop interacting.

Re-start the PC, then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no other applications active.

Try the following, in the order indicated.

1. If there are any other applications active, exit the other applications and try starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again.

2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC, and starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_ xxx.exe) with no other applications active.

Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start.) After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer (page 20). After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

After the router is fully started up, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

If your router does not support DHCP, the receiver’s IP address must be set in AVNavigator. First set the IP address on the receiver, then set the same address in AVNavigator (page 64). After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc. After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

Either refresh the page’s display using the browser’s refresh button or display a different page from the links so that the setting is transferred.

Symptom Causes Remedy

Software updating does not operate well.

When the Wiring Navi, Interactive Manual, Glossary or Software Update is launched, a warning about security protection appears on the browser.

There may be a problem with your Internet Service Provider’s network.

This is because of the browser’s security function.

Contact your contracted provider.

This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents.

USB interface

Symptoms Causes Remedies

The folders/files stored on a USB memory device are not displayed.

A USB memory device is not recognized.

A USB memory device is connected and displayed, but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back.

The folders/files are currently stored in a region other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.

The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.

There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in a USB memory device.

The audio files are copyrighted. Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB

The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications.

A USB hub is currently being used.

This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud.

Some formats of USB memory devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on this receiver.

The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver.

Store the folders/files in the FAT region.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 8 (page 28).

Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 28).

memory device cannot be played back (page 28).

Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications. Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver (page 28).

Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver (page 21).

This receiver does not support USB hubs (page 28).

Switch off and on again this receiver.

Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page 28).

See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver (page 29).

Page 75

Additional information

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed

Cannot enter correct text using the USB keyboard.

through a USB hub.

A PS2 keyboard is routed through a PS2/USB connector.

Keyboard is not a USB HID Class device.

Keyboard is not US-international layout keyboard.

This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver.

PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB connector. Use a USB keyboard.

Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID Class keyboard.

Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB: Some characters cannot be entered.

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con-

Playback does not start while “Connecting...” continues to be displayed.

The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated.

nected. The router is not switched on. Switch on the router. Internet security software is cur-

rently installed in the connected component.

The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on.

The component is currently disconnected from this receiver or the power supply.

The corresponding IP address is not properly set.

The IP address is being automatically configured.

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 20).

There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed.

Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver.

Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply.

Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router, or set up the network manually according to your network environment (page 64).

The automatic configuration process takes time. Please wait.

Symptoms Causes Remedies

The audio files stored on components on the network, such as a PC, cannot be played back.

Cannot access the component connected to the network.

Cannot access Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12.

Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 is not currently installed on your PC.

Audio files were recorded in formats other than MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and WMA.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12.

The component connected to the network is not properly operated.

The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing.

The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

The component connected to the network is not properly set.

There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network.

In case of Windows Media Player 11: You are currently logged onto

the domain through your PC with Windows XP or Windows Vista installed.

In case of Windows Media Player 12: You are currently logged onto

the domain through your PC with Windows 7 installed.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 on your PC (page

36). Play back audio files recorded in MP3,

WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note that some audio files recorded in these formats may not be played back on this receiver.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player

12. Try using another server. Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server.

Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode. Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network.

Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter the corresponding information again. Check whether the connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.

Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network.

Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine (page 37).

Page 76

13 Additional information

Symptoms Causes Remedies

Audio playback is undesirably stopped or disturbed.

Cannot listen to Internet radio stations.

The Home Media Gallery cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control.

The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver.

The LAN cable is currently disconnected.

There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network.

When in the DMR mode, depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed from the controller.

There is a connection routed through a wireless LAN on the same network.

The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation.

You are currently disconnected from the Internet.

The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted.

The remote control is not currently set to the Home Media Gallery mode.

Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver. Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted. Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed (page

39). Connect the LAN cable properly (page 20).

Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the network.

In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2.4 GHz band used by the wireless LAN. Make wired LAN connections not routed through a wireless LAN.

Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the problem, stop using other devices that emit electromagnetic waves.

Check the firewall settings for components on the network.

Check the connection settings for components on the network, and consult with your network service provider if necessary (page 64).

There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver (page 37).

Press HMG to set the remote control to the Home Media Gallery mode (page 37).

Troubleshooting of wireless LAN

Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. (Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.)

! Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC

OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected.

WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window.

! There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s

power off, then disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s power back on.

! If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times, there

is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The LAN cable is not firmly connected. ! Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 21).

Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an obstacle between them. ! Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit

closer together, etc.

There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN environment. ! Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electro-

magnetic waves.

! Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the

system with the wireless LAN.

Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router. ! When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed.

For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249”, the second wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.248”, using values between 2 and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that are not assigned to other wireless LAN converters or to other devices.

Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.). ! The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. See

Wireless LAN Converter on page 65 .

Page 77

Additional information

The wireless LAN converter is properly connected to the receiver and the wireless LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the wireless LAN converter cannot be set from the receiver (the settings screen cannot be displayed). ! If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is set to OFF and the IP address has been set manually,

the IP address set in the wireless LAN converter may not match.

In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP to ON. After the setting is completed, turn the receiv-

er’s power off. Next, turn the receiver’s power back on and check whether the wireless LAN converter’s settings can be displayed with the receiver.

If the settings can be displayed, change the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless

LAN converter as necessary.

The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc. ! Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter (including the

DHCP setting).

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power

back on.

Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings

of the wireless LAN router, etc.

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base

unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).

For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP

address to “192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS

to “192.168.1.1”. Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2). (*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to

other devices. (*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to

other devices. Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.

! The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless

LAN settings. For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check

the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless LAN

converter. Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve

the wireless LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings. The access point is set to conceal the SSID.

! In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen. If not, set the

SSID, etc., by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually. The access point’s security settings use WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key

authentication. ! The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken. ! Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings. About resetting

1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.

2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.

3. Release the reset button. When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.

Page 78

13 Additional information

About status messages

Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery.

Status messages Descriptions

STARTING H.M.G.

Connection Down File Format Error Track Not Found Server Error Server Disconnected empty Preset Not Stored Out of Range License Error

Item Already Exists

Favorite List Full

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on. ! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10

seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)

A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. Wait for a while.

The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed. Cannot be played back for some reasons. The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network. The selected server cannot be accessed. The server has been disconnected. There are no files stored in the selected folder. The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved. The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings. The license for the contents to be played back is invalid. This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites

folder has already been registered. This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites

folder but the Favorites folder is already full.

Important information regarding the HDMI connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information). If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.

Note

! The picture quality will change slightly during

conversion.

Note

! If your display only has one HDMI terminal,

you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.

! Depending on the component, audio output

may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).

! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll

have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit.

! Since the sound is muted on the display when

using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions.

Cleaning the unit

! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off

dust and dirt.

! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft

cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.

! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide

sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.

Page 79

Additional information

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

About iPod

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch, iTunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

About FLAC

FLAC Decoder

Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: ! Redistributions of source code must retain the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce

the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation

nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Page 80

13 Additional information

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 34 ) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT

DVD-A sources As above As above

SACD sources As above Stereo playback

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT

DVD-A sources As above As above

SACD sources As above Stereo playback

Auto Surround / ALC /

DIRECT

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

PURE DIRECT

Multichannel signal formats

Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-HD Master Audio ES

(6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-ES

(6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) Straight decoding Straight decoding

DTS-HD sources As above As above

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above

a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS-ES (Matrix)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

<a>

Page 81

Additional information

Pioneer Authorized Distributors

REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA

AFRITRONICS

Edenburg Terraces, Block A, 348 Rivonia boulevard, Rivonia. Johannesburg 2091 P.O. Box 148, Wendywood, 2144 TEL: 603 9900

HONG KONG

PIONEER (HK) LTD.

Suites 901-906, 9/F, World Commerce Centre, Harbour City, 11 Canton Road, Tsim Sha Tsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL: 2848-6488

INDONESIA

P.T. ADAB ALAM ELECTRONIC

Jl. K.H. Zainul Arifin No. 13A Jakarta-Pusat TEL: + (021) 6331924, 6331859, 6337665, 6337767

MALAYSIA

PIONEER TECHNOLOGY (M) SDN. BHD

16th Floor, Menara Uni. Asia 1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail, 50250 Kuala Lumpur. TEL: 03 2697 2920

PHILIPPINES

Zamony Venture Corporation

708 Apelo Cruz St. Malibay P.O. Box 473, Pasay city TEL: (02) 8520031

SINGAPORE

PIONEER ASIACENTRE PTE LTD. Domestic Service Dept.

253, Alexandra Road #04-01 Singapore, 159936 TEL: 64727555

TAIWAN

PIONEER HIGH FIDELITY TAIWAN CO., LTD.

8F., No.407, Ruiguang Road, Neihu Dist., Taipei City 11492, Taiwan PTC service telephone number: (02) 2657-7366

THAILAND

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

FL. 17 KPN Tower. 719 Rama 9Rd. Bangkapi, Huaykwang, Bangkok 10310, TEL: 02-717-0777 FAX: 02-717-0700

U.A.E. PIONEER GULF FZE

Lob 11-017, Jebel Ali Free Zone, P.O. Box 61226, Jebel Ali, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: 971-4-881-5756

AUSTRALIA

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

Melbourne; 5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202 TEL: 1800 988 268

NEW ZEALAND

MONACO CORP. LTD.

10 Rothwell Ave., Albany. Auckland P.O. Box 4399, Auckland 1 TEL: 94157444

MEXICO

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A.DE C.V.

Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho138 piso 10 Colonia Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270

REP. OF PANAMA

PIONEER INTERNATIONAL LATIN AMERICA, S.A.

Plaza Credicorp Bank, 14th Floor, Calle 50 No.120 Panama City 0816-01361 R.O.Panama TEL: 507-300-3900

Glossary

Audio formats/Decoding

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic

decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontallyoriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.

DTS Neural Surround

DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV).

Page 82

13 Additional information

Decoding

A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technology which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels.

Calibrating the sound field/ Improving the sound quality

Phase Control

The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.

Virtual Surround Back

Virtual Height

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression. With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.

Sound Retriever Air

Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.

PQLS

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.

ALC (Auto Level Control)

In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Front Stage Surround Advance

With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.

MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.

HDMI

Control with HDMI function

sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over

automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,

when the TV’s power is set to standby.

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal. The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be completed with a single HDMI cable.

Network function

AirPlay

DLNA

vTuner

vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the following website: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.”

aacPlus

AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)

FLAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/

Windows Media

Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.

Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Player 12

Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs. With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home. This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s website. ! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or

Windows Vista) ! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7) For more information check the official Microsoft website.

Windows Media DRM

Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights Management) service for the Windows Media

Page 83

Additional information

platform. It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service.

Router

A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called “wireless LAN routers”.

DHCP

Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting information as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.

Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi

“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo “Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.

WPS

Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and

PIN code configuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.

SSID

Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers.

Bluetooth function

Bluetooth wireless technology

A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves. It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.

Pairing

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details,

see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device. ! Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing

should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Receiver function

Operation Mode

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

Page 84

13 Additional information

Features index

Operation Mode

See Operation Mode Setup on page 25 .

AVNavigator

See About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 5 .

Full Auto MCACC

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 23 .

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 56 .

Manual MCACC setup

See Manual MCACC setup on page 58 .

PQLS

See Setting the PQLS function on page 42 .

Phase Control

See Better sound using Phase Control on page 35 .

Standing Wave

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Phase Control Plus

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Auto Sound Retriever

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

ALC (Auto Level Control)

See Auto playback on page 33 .

Front Stage Surround Advance

See Listening in surround sound on page 33 .

Sound Retriever Air

See Listening in surround sound on page 33 .

Dialog Enhancement

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Internet radio

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 37 .

vTuner

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 37 .

DLNA

See About network playback on page 38 .

AirPlay

See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes on page 36 .

Wireless LAN

See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 21 .

Playback High Resolution audio file

See About playable file formats on page 39 .

Slideshow

See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 28 .

Bluetooth ADAPTER

See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 30 .

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

See HDMI Setup on page 41 .

SACD Gain

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Auto delay

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option)

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Virtual Height

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Virtual Surround Back

See Setting the Audio options on page 44 .

Digital Video Converter

See Setting the Video options on page 46 .

Pure Cinema

See Setting the Video options on page 46 .

Progressive Motion

See Setting the Video options on page 46 .

Advanced Video Adjust

See Setting the Video options on page 46 .

Auto Power Down

See The Other Setup menu on page 66 .

Page 85

Additional information

Specifications

Audio Section

Maximum power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 10 %)

Front, Center, Surround, Surround back

.........................................160 W per channel

Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1 %)

Front, Center, Surround, Surround back

.........................................135 W per channel

FTC power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.2 %)

Front (stereo) ............................ 75 W + 75 W

Total harmonic distortion

.................0.06 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W/ch, 8 W)

Guaranteed speaker impedance ....... 6 W to 16 W

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)

LINE .....................................................100 dB

Frequency Response .....5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB

(Pure Direct Mode)

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)

LINE ......................................... 315 mV/47 kW

Output (Level/Impedance)

REC ......................................... 315 mV/2.2 kW

Tuner Section

Frequency Range (FM) ......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input (FM) .................. 75 W unbalanced

Frequency Range (AM)

9 kHz step ......................531 kHz to 1602 kHz

10 kHz step ....................530 kHz to 1700 kHz

Antenna (AM) .............. Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section

Signal level

Composite Video .......................1 Vp-p (75 W)

Component Video

....Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)

Corresponding maximum resolution

Component Video

................. 1080p (1125p) (Video convert off)

Digital In/Out Section

HDMI terminal ............................19-pin (Not DVI)

HDMI output type ...............................5 V, 100 mA

USB terminal ............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)

iPod terminal ......... USB, and Video (Composite)

ADAPTER PORT terminal ..................5 V, 100 mA

WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal

.............................................................5 V, 600 mA

Integrated Control Section

Control (SR) terminal .....ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

Control (IR) terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

IR signal ...............High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

Network Section

LAN terminal .................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX

Miscellaneous

Power requirements

............................. AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption ....................................580 W

In standby

.............0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)

0.4 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON) Dimensions

.......... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 362.5 mm (D)

Weight (without package)

VSX-1021 ................................................ 10 kg

VSX-921 ................................................. 9.9 kg

Number of Furnished Parts

MCACC Setup microphone ................................ 1

Remote control unit ............................................ 1

AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries .................... 2

iPod cable ............................................................ 1

AM loop antenna ................................................. 1

FM wire antenna ................................................. 1

Power cord CD-ROM (AVNavigator) These operating instructions

Note

! These specifications are applicable when the

power supply is 230 V.

! Specifications and the design are subject to

possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.

! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts

licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Page 86

13 Additional information

Preset code list

You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.

Important

! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not

be possible even if a preset code is entered.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach

the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 51 ).

Pioneer 0180, 0185, 0186, 0187, 0189, 0192, 0193, 0198

A.R. Systems 0040 Acme 0026 Acura 0027, 0039 ADC 0025, Admiral 0023, 0024,

0025, 0030, 0031

Adyson 0026, 0113, 0114 Agashi 0113, 0114 Agazi 0025 Aiko 0026, 0027, 0039,

0040, 0113, 0114

Aim 0040 Aiwa 0084 Akai 0027, 0028, 0034,

0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Akiba 0028, 0040 Akura 0025, 0028, 0039,

0040

Alaron 0113 Alba 0010, 0026, 0027,

0028, 0032, 0035, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0075, 0078, 0088, 0113

Alcyon 0017 Allorgan 0114 Allstar 0034, 0040

AMOi 0109 Amplivision 0010, 0026,

0041, 0114 Amstrad 0025, 0027, 0028, 0039, 0040

Anam 0027 Anglo 0027, 0039 Anitech 0017, 0025,

0027, 0039, 0040 Ansonic 0010, 0018, 0027, 0029, 0039, 0040

Arcam 0113, 0114 Arcam Delta 0026 Aristona 0034, 0037,

0040

Arthur Martin 0041 ASA 0023, 0031 Asberg 0017, 0034, 0040 Astra 0027 Asuka 0025, 0026, 0028,

0113, 0114 Atlantic 0026, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0113

Atori 0027, 0039 Auchan 0041 Audiosonic 0010, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0114 AudioTon 0010, 0026, 0114

Ausind 0017 Autovox 0017, 0023,

0025, 0026, 0114

Awa 0113, 0114 Baird 0114 Bang & Olufsen 0023,

0115 Basic Line 0027, 0028, 0034, 0039, 0040, 0114

Bastide 0026, 0114 Baur 0037, 0040 Bazin 0114 Beko 0010, 0035, 0040,

0060

Benq 0104 Beon 0034, 0037, 0040 Best 0010 Bestar 0010, 0034, 0040 Binatone 0026, 0114 Blue Sky 0028, 0040 Blue Star 0036 Boots 0026, 0114 BPL 0036, 0040 Brandt 0033, 0038, 0042,

0044

Brinkmann 0040 Brionvega 0023, 0034,

0037, 0040 Britannia 0026, 0113, 0114

Bruns 0023 BTC 0028 Bush 0027, 0028, 0030,

0032, 0034, 0036, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0065, 0078, 0114

Capsonic 0025 Carena 0040 Carrefour 0032 Cascade 0027, 0039,

0040

Casio 0106 Cathay 0034, 0037, 0040 CCE 0114 Centurion 0034, 0037,

0040

Century 0023 CGE 0010, 0017 Cimline 0027, 0039 City 0027, 0039 Clarivox 0037 Clatronic 0010, 0017,

0025, 0026, 0027, 0028, 0034, 0035, 0039, 0040, 0114

CMS 0113 CMS Hightec 0114 Concorde 0027, 0039

Condor 0010, 0026,

0034, 0035, 0039, 0040, 0113 Contec 0026, 0027, 0032, 0039, 0113 Continental Edison 0033

Cosmel 0027, 0039 Crosley 0017, 0023 Crown 0010, 0017, 0027,

0034, 0035, 0037, 0039, 0040 CS Electronics 0026, 0028, 0113

CTC Clatronic 0029 Cybertron 0028 Daewoo 0013, 0026,

0027, 0034, 0039, 0040, 0054, 0064, 0091, 0113, 0114

Dainichi 0028, 0113 Dansai 0025, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0113, 0114

Dantax 0010, 0037 Dawa 0040 Daytron 0027, 0039 De Graaf 0030 Decca 0026, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

Denver 0098, 0103 Desmet 0034, 0037, 0040 Diamant 0040 Diamond 0113 Dixi 0027, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0114

DTS 0027, 0039 Dual 0026, 0040, 0114 Dual-Tec 0026, 0027 Dumont 0023, 0026,

0029, 0114

Dux 0037 Dynatron 0034, 0037,

0040 Elbe 0010, 0018, 0040, 0114

Elcit 0023 Electa 0036

ELECTRO TECH 0027 Elin 0026, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0113

Elite 0028, 0034, 0040 Elman 0029 Elta 0027, 0039, 0113 Emerson 0010, 0023,

0040

Epson 0101 Erres 0034, 0037, 0040 ESC 0114 Etron 0027 Eurofeel 0114, 0025 Euroline 0037 Euroman 0010, 0025,

0026, 0034, 0040, 0113, 0114 Europhon 0026, 0029, 0034, 0040, 0113, 0114

Expert 0041 Exquisit 0040 Fenner 0027, 0039 Ferguson 0033, 0037,

0038, 0042 Fidelity 0026, 0030, 0040, 0113

Filsai 0114 Finlandia 0030 Finlux 0017, 0023, 0026,

0029, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0114 Firstline 0026, 0027, 0034, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114 Fisher 0010, 0023, 0026, 0032, 0035, 0114

Flint 0034, 0040 Formenti 0017, 0023,

0024, 0026, 0037, 0113

Formenti/Phoenix 0113 Fortress 0023, 0024 Fraba 0010, 0040 Friac 0010 Frontech 0025, 0027,

0030, 0031, 0039, 0114

Fujitsu 0114 Fujitsu General 0114

Funai 0025 Galaxi 0040, 0035 Galaxis 0010, 0040 GBC 0027, 0032, 0039 Geant Casino 0041 GEC 0026, 0031, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0114

Geloso 0027, 0030, 0039 General Technic 0027,

0039 Genexxa 0028, 0031, 0034, 0040

Giant 0114 GoldHand 0113 Goldline 0040 Goldstar 0010, 0026,

0027, 0030, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114 Goodmans 0025, 0027, 0032, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0107, 0114

Gorenje 0010, 0035 GPM 0028 Graetz

0031 Granada 0017, 0026, 0030, 0032, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0041, 0114 Grandin 0027, 0028, 0036, 0037

Gronic 0114 Grundig 0009, 0010,

0017, 0040, 0047 Halifax 0025, 0026, 0113, 0114 Hampton 0026, 0113, 0114 Hanseatic 0010, 0018, 0026, 0027, 0032, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0114 Hantarex 0027, 0039, 0040

Hantor 0040 Harwood 0039, 0040 HCM 0025, 0026, 0027,

0036, 0039, 0040, 0114

Hema 0039, 0114 Higashi 0113

HiLine 0040 Hinari 0027, 0028, 0032,

0034, 0037, 0039, 0040

Hisawa 0028, 0036, 0041 Hitachi 0022, 0026, 0030,

0031, 0032, 0040, 0076, 0111, 0114

Hornyphon 0034, 0040 Hoshai 0028 Huanyu 0026, 0113 Hygashi 0026, 0113,

0114 Hyper 0026, 0027, 0039, 0113, 0114 Hypson 0025, 0026, 0034, 0036, 0037, 0040, 0041, 0114

Iberia 0040 ICE 0025, 0026, 0027,

0028, 0034, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

ICeS 0113 Imperial 0010, 0017,

0031, 0034, 0035, 0040

Indiana 0034, 0037, 0040 Ingelen 0031 Ingersol 0027, 0039 Inno Hit 0017, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0114

Innovation 0025, 0027 Interactive 0010 Interbuy 0027, 0039 Interfunk 0010, 0023,

0031, 0034, 0037, 0040

International 0113 Intervision 0010, 0025,

0026, 0029, 0040, 0114 Irradio 0017, 0027, 0028, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040

Isukai 0028, 0040 ITC 0026, 0114 ITS 0028, 0034, 0036,

0040, 0113

ITT 0027, 0031 ITV 0027, 0037, 0040

Page 87

Additional information

JVC 0019, 0020, 0032, 0034, 0077, 5064 Kaisui 0026, 0027, 0028, 0036, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Kamosonic 0026 Kamp 0026, 0113 Kapsch 0031 Karcher 0010, 0026,

0027, 0037, 0040

Kawasho 0113 Kendo 0010, 0029, 0030,

0040

KIC 0114 Kingsley 0026, 0113 Kneissel 0010, 0018,

0040

Kolster 0034, 0040 Konka 0028 Korpel 0034, 0037, 0040 Korting 0010, 0023 Kosmos 0040 Koyoda 0027 KTV 0026, 0114 Kyoto 0113, 0114 Lasat 0010 Lenco 0027, 0039 Lenoir 0026, 0027, 0039 Leyco 0025, 0034, 0037,

0040 LG 0010, 0021, 0026, 0027, 0030, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0071, 0074, 0081, 0105, 0113, 0114

LG/GoldStar 0014 Liesenk 0037 Liesenkotter 0040 Life 0025, 0027 Lifetec 0025, 0027, 0039,

0040

Lloyds 0039 Loewe 0010, 0018, 0040,

0051, 0052 Loewe Opta 0023, 0034, 0037 Luma 0030, 0037, 0039, 0040

Lumatron 0030, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0114

Lux May 0034 Luxor 0026, 0030, 0114 M Electronic 0026, 0027,

0031, 0033, 0034, 0037 Magnadyne 0023, 0029, 0037 Magnafon 0017, 0026, 0029, 0113

Magnum 0025, 0027 Mandor 0025 Manesth 0025, 0026,

0034, 0037, 0040, 0114 Marantz 0034, 0037, 0040

Marelli 0023 Mark 0034, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0113, 0114

Masuda 0114 Matsui 0026, 0027, 0030,

0032, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0114 Mediator 0034, 0037, 0040

Medion 0025, 0027, 0040 M-Electronic 0039, 0040,

0113, 0114

Melvox 0041 Memorex 0027, 0039 Memphis 0027, 0039 Mercury 0039, 0040 Metz 0023, 0184, 0185,

0186, 0187

Micromaxx 0025, 0027 Microstar 0025, 0027 Minerva 0017 Minoka 0034, 0040 Mitsubishi 0023, 0032,

0034, 0040, 0085 Mivar 0010, 0017, 0018, 0026, 0113, 0114

Motion 0017 MTC 0010, 0113 Multi System 0037 Multitech 0010, 0026,

0027, 0029, 0030, 0032,

0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Murphy 0026, 0113 Naonis 0030 NEC 0032, 0114 Neckermann 0010, 0023,

0026, 0030, 0034, 0035, 0037, 0040, 0114

NEI 0034, 0037, 0040 Neufunk 0039, 0040 New Tech 0027, 0034,

0039, 0040, 0114

New World 0028 Nicamagic 0026, 0113 Nikkai 0025, 0026, 0028,

0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114 Nobliko 0017, 0026, 0029, 0113

Nokia 0031 Nordic 0114 Nordmende 0023, 0031,

0033, 0034

Nordvision 0037 Novatronic 0040 Oceanic 0031, 0041 Okano 0010, 0035, 0040 ONCEAS 0026 Opera 0040 Orbit 0034, 0040 Orion 0027, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0079

Orline 0040 Osaki 0025, 0026, 0028,

0040, 0114

Oso 0028 Otto Versand 0024,

0026, 0032, 0034, 0036, 0037, 0040, 0114

Pael 0026, 0113 Palladium 0010, 0026,

0035, 0040, 0114

Palsonic 0114 Panama 0025, 0026,

0027, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Panasonic 0008, 0031, 0040, 0043, 0049, 0099, 0102, 0194, 0191, 0195, 0196, 0197, 0190

Panavision 0040 Pathe Cinema 0010,

0018, 0026, 0041, 0113

Pausa 0027, 0039 Perdio 0040, 0113 Perfekt 0040 Philco 0010, 0017, 0023,

0040

Philharmonic 0026, 0114 Philips 0000, 0002, 0023,

0026, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0045, 0048, 0050, 0055, 0056, 0058, 0059, 0067, 0068, 0080, 0081, 0087, 0090, 0097, 0100 Phoenix 0010, 0023, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0113 Phonola 0023, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0113 Plantron 0025, 0034, 0039, 0040

Playsonic 0114 Poppy 0027, 0039 Prandoni-Prince 0017,

0030

Precision 0026, 0114 Prima 0027, 0031, 0039 Profex 0027, 0039 Profi-Tronic 0034, 0040 Proline 0034, 0040 Prosonic 0010, 0026,

0037, 0040, 0113, 0114, 0117 Protech 0025, 0026, 0027, 0029, 0034, 0037, 0114

Provision 0037, 0040 Pye 0034, 0037, 0040,

0083

Pymi 0027, 0039 Quandra Vision 0041 Quelle 0025, 0026, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0114

Questa 0032 Radialva 0040 Radio Shack 0040 Radiola 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

Radiomarelli 0023, 0040 Radiotone 0010, 0034,

0039, 0040

Rank 0032 Recor 0040 Redstar 0040 Reflex 0040 Revox 0010, 0034, 0037,

0040,

Rex 0025, 0030, 0031 RFT 0010, 0018, 0023 Rhapsody 0113 R-Line 0034, 0037, 0040 Roadstar 0025, 0027,

0028, 0039

Robotron 0023 Rowa 0113, 0114 Royal Lux 0010 RTF 0023 Saba 0023, 0031, 0033,

0038, 0042, 0044 Saisho 0025, 0026, 0027, 0039, 0114

Salora 0030, 0031 Sambers 0017, 0029 Samsung 0004, 0005,

0010, 0025, 0026, 0027, 0034, 0035, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0062, 0063, 0066, 0089, 0093, 0113, 0114

Sandra 0026, 0113, 0114 Sansui 0034, 0040 Sanyo 0010, 0018, 0026,

0032, 0039, 0072, 0113, 0114

SBR 0037, 0040 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0031 Schneider 0026, 0028,

0034, 0037, 0040, 0075, 0114

SEG 0025, 0026, 0029, 0032, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0075, 0113, 0114

SEI 0040 SEI-Sinudyne 0023,

0029, 0031

Seleco 0030, 0031, 0032 Sencora 0027, 0039 Sentra 0039 Serino 0113 Sharp 0015, 0016, 0024,

0032, 0069, 0092

Siarem 0023, 0029, 0040 Sierra 0034, 0040 Siesta 0010 Silva 0113 Silver 0032 Singer 0023, 0029, 0041 Sinudyne 0023, 0029,

0037, 0040

Skantic 0031 Solavox 0031 Sonitron 0010, 0114 Sonoko 0025, 0026,

0027, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0114

Sonolor 0031, 0041 Sontec 0010, 0034, 0037,

0040 Sony 0001, 0003, 0027, 0032, 0046, 0053, 0057, 0070, 0073, 0082, 0086, 0096, 0110, 0112 Sound & Vision 0028, 0029 Soundwave 0034, 0037, 0040 Standard 0026, 0027, 0028, 0034, 0039, 0040, 0114

Starlight 0037 Starlite 0039, 0040 Stenway 0036 Stern 0030, 0031 Strato 0039, 0040 Stylandia 0114 Sunkai 0027,

Sunstar 0039, 0040 Sunwood 0027, 0034,

0039, 0040

Superla 0026, 0113, 0114 SuperTech 0039, 0040,

0113

Supra 0027, 0039 Susumu 0028 Sutron 0027, 0039 Sydney 0026, 0113, 0114 Sysline 0037 Sytong 0113 Tandy 0024, 0026, 0028,

0031, 0114 Tashiko 0029, 0030, 0032, 0113, 0114 Tatung 0026, 0034, 0037, 0040, 0114

TCM 0025, 0027 Teac 0040, 0114 Tec 0026, 0027, 0039,

0114

TEDELEX 0114 Teleavia 0033 Telecor 0040, 0114 Telefunken 0033, 0034,

0040, 0042

Telegazi 0040 Telemeister 0040 Telesonic 0040 Telestar 0040 Teletech 0027, 0037,

0039, 0040

Teleton 0026, 0114 Televideon 0113 Televiso 0041 Tensai 0027, 0028, 0034,

0039, 0040, 0114

Tesmet 0034 Tevion 0025, 0027 Texet 0026, 0039, 0113,

0114 Thomson 0006, 0007, 0026, 0033, 0034, 0038, 0040, 0042, 0044, 0095

Thorn 0037, 0040 Tokai 0034, 0040, 0114

Tokyo 0026, 0113 Tomashi 0036 Toshiba 0011, 0012,

0032, 0061, 0094, 0114

Towada 0031, 0114 Trakton 0114 Trans Continens 0040,

0114

Transtec 0113 Trident 0114 Triumph 0040 Vestel 0030, 0031, 0034,

0035, 0037, 0040, 0114 Vexa 0027, 0037, 0039, 0040

Victor 0032, 0034 VIDEOLOGIC 0113 Videologique 0026,

0028, 0113, 0114

VideoSystem 0034, 0040 Videotechnic 0113, 0114 Viewsonic 0108 Visiola 0026, 0113 Vision 0034, 0040, 0114 Vortec 0034, 0037, 0040 Voxson 0017, 0023,

0030, 0031, 0034, 0040 Waltham 0026, 0040, 0114

Watson 0034, 0037, 0040 Watt Radio 0026, 0029,

0113

Wega 0023, 0032, 0040 Wegavox 0039 Weltblick 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114 White Westinghouse 0026, 0029, 0037, 0040, 0113

Xrypton 0040 Yamishi 0040, 0114 Yokan 0040 Yoko 0010, 0025, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037, 0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Yorx 0028 Zanussi 0030, 0114

Page 88

13 Additional information

DVD

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2246, 2215 AEG 2093 Aiwa 2054 Akai 2001 Akura 2091 Alba 2027, 2038, 2048 Amitech 2093 AMW 2094 Awa 2094 Bang & Olufsen 2096 Bellagio 2094 Best Buy 2090 Brainwave 2093 Brandt 2017, 2044 Bush 2027, 2048, 2082,

2089

Cambridge Audio 2085 CAT 2087, 2088 Centrum 2088 CGV 2085, 2093 Cinetec 2094 Clatronic 2089 Coby 2095 Conia 2082 Continental Edison

2094

Crown 2093 C-Tech 2086 CyberHome 2008, 2037 Daenyx 2094 Daewoo 2035, 2059,

2093, 2094 Daewoo International 2094

Dalton 2092 Dansai 2084, 2093 Daytek 2010, 2033, 2094 Dayton 2094 DEC 2089 Decca 2093 Denon 2066, 2068

Denver 2069, 2089, 2091, 2095

Denzel 2083 Diamond 2085, 2086 DK Digital 2034 Dmtech 2000 Dual 2083 DVX 2086 Easy Home 2090 Eclipse 2085 Electrohome 2093 Elin 2093 Elta 2047, 2093 Enzer 2083 Finlux 2085, 2093 Gericom 2050 Global Solutions 2086 Global Sphere 2086 Goodmans 2027, 2070,

2089

Graetz 2083 Grundig 2053 Grunkel 2093 H&B 2089 Haaz 2085, 2086 HiMAX 2090 Hitachi 2015, 2083, 2090 Innovation 2002 JVC 2024, 2041, 2057 Kansai 2095 Kennex 2093 Kenwood 2051 KeyPlug 2093 Kiiro 2093 Kingavon 2089 Kiss 2083 Koda 2089 KXD 2090 Lawson 2086 Lecson 2084 Lenco 2089, 2093

LG 2016, 2020, 2040,

2043, 2065, 2076

Life 2002 Lifetec 2002 Limit 2086 Loewe 2056 LogicLab 2086 Magnavox 2089 Majestic 2095 Marantz 2062 Marquant 2093 Matsui 2044 Mecotek 2093 Medion 2002 MiCO 2085 Micromaxx 2002 Microstar 2002 Minoka 2093 Mizuda 2089, 2090 Monyka 2083 Mustek 2006 Mx Onda 2085 Naiko 2093 Neufunk 2083 Nevir 2093 NU-TEC 2082 Onkyo 2072 Optim 2084 Optimus 2004 Orava 2089 Orbit 2094 Orion 2061 P&B 2089 Pacific 2086 Panasonic 2018, 2019,

2026, 2032, 2036, 2075 Philips 2005, 2011, 2022, 2023, 2031, 2039, 2062

Pointer 2093 Portland 2093 Powerpoint 2094 Prosonic 2095

Provision 2089 Raite 2083 RedStar 2091, 2093,

2095

Reoc 2086 Roadstar 2021, 2089 Ronin 2094 Rowa 2082 Rownsonic 2088 Saba 2017, 2044 Sabaki 2086 Saivod 2093 Samsung 2015, 2042,

2063, 2078, 2081

Sansui 2085, 2086, 2093 Sanyo 2045, 2071 ScanMagic 2006 Schaub Lorenz 2093 Schneider 2000 Scientific Labs 2086 Scott 2025, 2092 SEG 2021, 2083, 2086,

2094

Sharp 2002, 2046, 2079 Sigmatek 2090 Silva 2091 Singer 2085, 2086 Skymaster 2058, 2086 Skyworth 2091 Slim Art 2093 SM Electronic 2086 Sony 2009, 2013, 2028,

2029, 2030, 2055, 2080

Soundmaster 2086 Soundmax 2086 Spectra 2094 Standard 2086 Star Cluster 2086 Starmedia 2089 Sunkai 2093 Supervision 2086 Synn 2086

Tatung 2035, 2093 TCM 2002 Teac 2067, 2082, 2086 Tec 2091 Technika 2093 Telefunken 2088 Tensai 2093

Tevion 2002, 2086, 2092 Thomson 2003, 2017,

2060, 2064

Tokai 2083, 2091 Toshiba 2007, 2061,

2073, 2074, 2077

TRANScontinents 2094

Trio 2093 TruVision 2090 Wharfedale 2085, 2086 Xbox 2003 Xlogic 2086, 2093 XMS 2093 Yamada 2094

Yamaha 2011 Yamakawa 2083, 2094 Yukai 2006, 2052

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).

Pioneer 2247, 2248 Denon 2212, 2213, 2214 Hitachi 2209, 2210, 2211 JVC 2192, 2193, 2195,

2196, 2197, 2198

Kenwood 2109 LG 2188, 2189 Marantz 2204, 2205 Mitsubishi 2202, 2203 Onkyo 2191

Panasonic 2179, 2180,

2181

Philips 2182 Samsung 2184 Sharp 2206, 2207, 2208

Sony 2185, 2186, 2187,

2194

Toshiba 2190, 2164 Yamaha 2199, 2200,

2201

DVR (BDR, HDR)

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.

Pioneer 2238, 2239, 2240, 2241, 2242, 2243, 2244, 2245

Panasonic 2165, 2171 Sharp 2169, 2177

Sony 2170, 2173, 2174,

2175, 2178 Toshiba 2176

VCR

Pioneer 1077 Adyson 1017 Aiwa 1000, 1001, 1002 Akai 1001 Akiba 1007, 1017 Akura 1001, 1007, 1017 Alba 1002, 1003, 1004,

1007, 1017, 1018

Ambassador 1004 Amstrad 1000, 1017,

1018

Anitech 1007, 1017 ASA 1005, 1006 Asuka 1000, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1017

Audiosonic 1018

Baird 1000, 1001, 1003,

1018

Bang & Olufsen 1019 Basic Line 1002, 1003,

1004, 1007, 1017, 1018

Baur 1006 Bestar 1003, 1004, 1018 Black Panther Line

1003, 1018

Blaupunkt 1006 Bondstec 1004, 1017 Bush 1002, 1003, 1007,

1017, 1018

Cathay 1018 Catron 1004 CGE 1000, 1001 Cimline 1002, 1007, 1017

Clatronic 1004, 1017 Condor 1003, 1004, 1018 Crown 1003, 1004, 1007,

1017, 1018 Daewoo 1003, 1004, 1018

Dansai 1007, 1017, 1018 Dantax 1002 Daytron 1003, 1018 De Graaf 1006 Decca 1000, 1001, 1006 Denko 1017 Dual 1001, 1027, 1018 Dumont 1000, 1006 Elbe 1018 Elcatech 1017 Elsay 1017

Elta 1007, 1017, 1018 Emerson 1017 ESC 1003, 1018 Etzuko 1007, 1017 Ferguson 1001 Fidelity 1000, 1017 Finlandia 1006 Finlux 1000, 1001, 1006 Firstline 1002, 1005,

1007, 1017

Flint 1002 Formenti/Phoenix 1006 Frontech 1004 Fujitsu 1000 Funai 1000 Galaxy 1000 GBC 1004, 1007

Page 89

Additional information

GEC 1006 Geloso 1007 General 1004 General Technic 1002 GoldHand 1007, 1017 Goldstar 1000, 1015 Goodmans 1000, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1007, 1017, 1018

Graetz 1001 Granada 1006 Grandin 1000, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1007, 1017, 1018

Grundig 1006 ,1007 Hanseatic 1005, 1006,

1018

Harwood 1017 HCM 1007, 1017 Hinari 1002, 1007, 1017,

1018

Hisawa 1002 Hitachi 1000, 1001, 1006,

1012 Hypson 1002, 1007, 1017, 1018

Impego 1004 Imperial 1000 Inno Hit 1003, 1004,

1006, 1007, 1017, 1018

Innovation 1002 Interbuy 1005, 1017 Interfunk 1006 Intervision 1000, 1018 Irradio 1005, 1007, 1017 ITT 1001 ITV 1003, 1005, 1018 JVC 1001, 1013 Kaisui 1007, 1017 Karcher 1006 Kendo 1002, 1003, 1004,

1017

Korpel 1007, 1017 Kyoto 1017 Lenco 1003 Leyco 1007, 1017 LG 1000, 1005, 1016

Lifetec 1002 Loewe Opta 1005, 1006 Logik 1007, 1017 Lumatron 1003, 1018 Luxor 1017 M Electronic 1000 Manesth 1007, 1017 Marantz 1006 Mark 1018 Matsui 1002, 1005 Matsushita 1000, 1006 Mediator 1006 Medion 1002 Memorex 1000, 1005 Memphis 1007, 1017 Micromaxx 1002 Microstar 1002 Migros 1000 Multitech 1000, 1004,

1006, 1007, 1017

Murphy 1000 NEC 1001 Neckermann 1001, 1006 NEI 1006 Nesco 1007, 1017 Nikkai 1004, 1017, 1018 Nokia 1001, 1018 Nordmende 1001 Oceanic 1000, 1001 Okano 1002, 1017, 1018 Orion 1002 Orson 1000 Osaki 1000, 1005, 1007,

1017

Otto Versand 1006 Palladium 1001, 1005,

1007, 1017

Panasonic 1010 Pathe Marconi 1001 Perdio 1000 Philco 1017 Philips 1006, 1012, 1019 Phonola 1006 Portland 1003, 1004,

1018

Prinz 1000 Profex 1007

Proline 1000 Prosonic 1002, 1018 Pye 1006 Quelle 1000, 1006 Radialva 1017 Radiola 1006 Rex 1001 RFT 1004, 1006, 1017 Roadstar 1003, 1005,

1007, 1017, 1018

Royal 1017 Saba 1001 Saisho 1002, 1007 Samsung 1008 Samurai 1004, 1017 Sansui 1001 Saville 1018 SBR 1006 Schaub Lorenz 1000,

1001 Schneider 1000, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1017, 1018

SEG 1007, 1017, 1018 SEI-Sinudyne 1006 Seleco 1001 Sentra 1004, 1017 Sentron 1007, 1017 Sharp 1009 Shintom 1007, 1017 Shivaki 1005 Siemens 1005 Silva 1005 Silver 1018 Sinudyne 1006 Solavox 1004 Sonneclair 1017 Sonoko 1003, 1018 Sontec 1005 Sony 1011 Standard 1003, 1018 Stern 1018 Sunkai 1002 Sunstar 1000 Suntronic 1000 Sunwood 1007, 1017 Symphonic 1017

Taisho 1002 Tandberg 1018 Tashiko 1000 Tatung 1000, 1001, 1006 TCM 1002 Teac 1018 Tec 1004, 1017, 1018 Teleavia 1001 Telefunken 1001 Teletech 1017, 1018 Tenosal 1007, 1017 Tensai 1000, 1005, 1007,

1017

Tevion 1002 Thomson 1001, 1015 Thorn 1001 Tokai 1005, 1007, 1017 Tonsai 1007 Toshiba 1001, 1006,

1014

Towada 1007, 1017 Towika 1007, 1017 TVA 1004 Uher 1005 Ultravox 1018 United Quick Star 1003,

1018 Universum 1000, 1005, 1006

Videon 1002 Weltblick 1005 Yamishi 1007, 1017 Yokan 1007, 1017 Yoko 1004, 1005, 1007,

1017

Satellite Set Top Box

Pioneer 6096, 6095, 6080, 6176, 0196

@sat 6127 @Sky 6114 ABsat 6056 Acoustic Solutions 6093 ADB 6050 Akai 6090 Akura 6104 Alba 6052, 6076, 6056,

6093

Allsat 6090 Alltech 6056 Allvision 6128, 6114,

6075

Amitronica 6056 Ampere 6132, 6137 Amstrad 6132, 6137,

6112, 6056, 6078, 6119

Anglo 6056 Ankaro 6056 Ansonic 6121 Anttron 6076 Apollo 6052 Apro 6108 Arcon 6068 Arcus 6069 Armstrong 6090 Arnion 6127 ASA 6106 Asat 6090 ASCI 6089, 6114 ASLF 6056 AssCom 6096 Astra 6131, 6056 Astratec 6144, 6145 Astrell 6078 Astro 6053, 6112, 6131,

6076, 6122, 6091, 6098, 6119

Atlanta 6121 Atsat 6127 AtSky 6114 Audioline 6108 Audioton 6076

Austar 6050 Avalon 6137 Axil 6120, 6062, 6121 Axis 6143 Axitronic 6104 B.net 6108 B@ytronic 6106, 6075 BELL 6191 Balmet 6062 Beko 6052 Belson 6121 Big Sat 6062 Black Diamond 6093 Blaupunkt 6053 Blue Sky 6056 Boca 6132, 6056, 6128,

6061, 6133, 6113, 6063, 6064

Bodner & Mann 6070 Boshmann 6120, 6123 Boston 6103 Brainwave 6107, 6108 British Sky Broadcasting 6086 Broco 6056 BskyB 6086 BT 6071 Bubu Sat 6056 Bush 6130, 6093, 6140,

6104, 6108, 6144, 6077, 6066, 6141, 6058

Cambridge 6112 Canal Digital 6096 Canal Satellite 6096,

6095, 6154, 6153

Canal+ 6096, 6153 CGV 6120, 6059 Cherokee 6070 Chess 6089, 6056, 6114,

6104 CityCom 6105, 6131, 6128, 6055, 6068, 6117

Clark 6076 Classic 6108 Clatronic 6120

Clayton 6104 Clemens Kamphus 6137 Cobra 6137 Colombia 6132 Columbia 6132 Comag 6132, 6128, 6061,

6075, 6120, 6133, 6113, 6065, 6135, 6063, 6064

Comsat 6120 Condor 6131, 6129 Connexions 6137 Conrad 6132, 6112,

6083, 6131

Coship 6062, 6108 Crown 6093 Cryptovision 6052 CS 6123 Cyfrowy Polsat 6096 Cyrus 6090 D-box 6151 Daewoo 6143, 6056,

6071, 6144, 6058

Dantax 6104 Deltasat 6068 Denver 6121 Digatron 6107 Digenius 6105, 6102 Digiality 6131, 6114 Digifusion 6144, 6145 Digihome 6093, 6141,

6094

DigiLogic 6093 DigiQuest 6127, 6062,

6123

DigiSat 6128 Digisky 6062 Digital 6063 Digital Vision 6145 DigitalBox 6098, 6123 Dijam 6071 DirecTV 6139 Discovery 6070 Distratel 6078, 6126 DMT 6068 DNT 6090, 6137

Doro 6108 Dual 6128 Durabrand 6093, 6094 DX Antenna 6171 E Aichi 6172 Echolink 6061 Echostar 6096, 6057,

6115, 6109, 6137, 6052, 6056, 6177

Edision 6123 Einhell 6132, 6112, 6056 Elap 6056, 6120, 6059 Elbe 6121 Elless 6106 Elsat 6056 Elta 6090 eMTech 6072 Energy Sistem 6123 Engel 6056, 6103 EP Sat 6052 Eurieult 6078 Eurocrypt 6052 EuroLine 6103 Europa 6112, 6131 Europhon 6132, 6105,

6131

Eurosat 6065 Eurosky 6132, 6089,

6105, 6112, 6131, 6106

Eurostar 6131, 6055 Eutelsat 6056 Eutra 6106 Evesham 6094 Exator 6076 Fagor 6079 Fenner 6056 Ferguson 6052, 6140,

6144, 6145

Fidelity 6112 Finlandia 6052 Finlux 6052, 6083, 6104 FinnSat 6106 Flair Mate 6056 Fly Com 6062 FMD 6089, 6120, 6062

Page 90

13 Additional information

Freecom 6112 FTEmaximal 6056, 6065 Fuba 6053, 6105, 6137,

6083, 6102, 6072

Fujitsu 6164, 6165, 6166 Galaxis 6096, 6143 Gardiner 6055 Garnet 6068 GbSAT 6072 Gecco 6122, 6075 General Satellite 6117 Globo 6106, 6103, 6114,

6075, 6133

GOD Digital 6090 Gold Box 6096, 6095 Gold Vision 6123 Golden Interstar 6126 Goodmans 6052, 6130,

6093, 6140, 6147, 6066, 6094, 6077

Gran Prix 6106 Granada 6052 Grandin 6104 Grocos 6115, 6062 Grundig 6108, 6096,

6053, 6093, 6140, 6094, 6077, 6066

Haensel & Gretel 6132 Haier 6121 Hama 6059 Hanseatic 6091, 6098 Hauppauge 6107, 6108 HB 6072 Heliocom 6131 Helium 6131 Hiro 6065 Hirschmann 6143, 6053,

6105, 6137, 6112, 6083, 6131, 6106, 6128, 6075, 6065 Hitachi 6052, 6094, 6093, 6163

HNE 6132 Hornet 6127 Houston 6137 Humax 6117, 6118, 6144

Huth 6132, 6131, 6068, 6069

Hyundai 6068 ID Digital 6117 ILLUSION sat 6123 Imperial 6098, 6092,

6099, 6114, 6108

Ingelen 6089, 6137 Inno Hit 6104 International 6132 Interstar 6072 Intervision 6131 Inves 6144 iotronic 6120 ITT Nokia 6083, 6052 Jaeger 6114 JERROLD 6159, 6180,

6181, 6182, 6183, 6184, 6185, 6186, 6187, 6188

K-SAT 6056 Kamm 6056 Kaon 6127 KaTelco 6143 Kathrein 6053, 6090,

6089, 6055, 6138, 6076, 6148, 6059, 6056

Kendo 6128 Kenwood 6096 Key West 6132 Kiton 6089 KR 6076 Kreiling 6089, 6104,

6070

Kreiselmeyer 6053 Kyostar 6076 L&S Electronic 6132,

6114

Labgear 6071 LaSAT 6053, 6132, 6105,

6131, 6106

Leiko 6104 Lemon 6114 Lenco 6131, 6056 Lenson 6112 LG 6068 Lifesat 6132, 6105, 6056 Listo 6104

Lodos 6093 Logik 6093 Logix 6068 Lorenzen 6132, 6105,

6131, 6102, 6107, 6133, 6113

Luxor 6112, 6083, 6141 M Electronic 6055 Manata 6132, 6056 Manhattan 6052, 6127 Marantz 6090 Maspro 6053, 6056 Matsui 6053, 6093, 6147,

6104, 6144, 6145

Max 6131 Maximum 6068, 6114 Mediabox 6096, 6095 Mediacom 6074 MediaSat 6096, 6095,

6112, 6154, 6153 Medion 6132, 6105, 6056, 6106, 6068, 6128, 6114, 6075, 6104

Medison 6056 Mega 6090 MegaSat 6065 Metronic 6132, 6076,

6056, 6055, 6078, 6126, 6114, 6120

Metz 6053 Micro 6112, 6131, 6076,

6056, 6107

Micro Elektronic 6056 Micro Technology 6056 Micromaxx 6105 Microstar 6105, 6068,

6102

Microtec 6056 Mitsubishi 6052 Morgan’s 6090, 6132,

6056, 6128, 6075

Multibroadcast 6050 Multichoice 6050 Myryad 6090 Mysat 6056 MySky 6087, 6088 NEC 6162

NEOTION 6114 Netsat 6139 Neuhaus 6112, 6131,

6056 Neuling 6132, 6128, 6133, 6064

Neusat 6056 Neveling 6102 Newton 6137 NextWave 6069 Nichimen 6130 Nikko 6056, 6090 Noda Electronic 6078 Nokia 6052, 6083, 6096,

6082

Nordmende 6052 Octagon 6076 OctalTV 6107 Onn 6093, 6094 Opentel 6128, 6075 Optex 6089, 6056, 6126,

6120, 6079, 6104

Orbis 6128, 6114, 6075 Orbitech 6089, 6112,

6091, 6098, 6092, 6099

P/Sat 6128 Pace 6149, 6096, 6090,

6088, 6087, 6057, 6052

Pacific 6093 Packard Bell 6143 Palcom 6105, 6102, 6115 Palladium 6137, 6112 Palsat 6112 Panasonic 6054, 6052,

6167, 6168, 6169

Panda 6053, 6052, 6131 Pansat 6067 Pass 6059 Patriot 6132 peeKTon 6062, 6121 Philips 6096, 6053, 6090,

6151, 6095, 6139, 6153, 6144, 6108, 6055, 6076, 6052

Phoenix 6121 Phonotrend 6109 Pilotime 6154

Pino 6114 Pixx 6067 Planet 6137 PMB 6056, 6079 Polytron 6137 Portland 6071 Preisner 6132, 6137,

6119, 6061

Premier 6095 Primacom 6143 Primestar 6178 Pro Basic 6096, 6060 Proline 6093 Promax 6052 Proscan 6110 Quelle 6105, 6131 Radiola 6090 Radix 6137, 6119 Rainbow 6076 RCA 6110, 6173, 6175,

6179

Rebox 6072 Regal 6103 RFT 6090 Roadstar 6096, 6056 Rollmaster 6120 Rover 6056 Rownsonic 6059 SA 6155, 6157, 6189,

6190

SAB 6103, 6127 Saba 6060, 6131, 6106,

6078

Sabre 6052 Sagem 6151, 6134, 6153 Saivod 6121 Salora 6128 Samsung 6096, 6074,

6073, 6149, 6129

Sanyo 6104 SAT 6112 Sat Control 6127 Sat Partner 6112, 6076 Sat Team 6056 SAT+ 6115 Satcom 6131 Satec 6056

Satelco 6128 Satplus 6098 SatyCon 6123 Schaecke 6076 Schaub Lorenz 6072,

6121

Schneider 6074, 6103 Schwaiger 6143, 6132,

6138, 6131, 6106, 6078, 6068, 6114, 6075, 6064, 6062, 6133, 6123, 6108, 6063

Scientific Atlanta 6085 SCS 6105, 6106 Sedea Electronique

6132, 6089, 6074, 6126, 6104

Seemann 6137 SEG 6089, 6068, 6103,

6093, 6104

SEI 6170 Septimo 6078 Serd 6075 Servimat 6079 ServiSat 6056, 6103 Shark 6123 Sharp 6141, 6094 Siemens 6053, 6137,

6114

Sigmatek 6121 Silva 6105 SilverCrest 6135, 6063 Skantin 6056 SKR 6056 SKT 6132 SKY 6139, 6086, 6088,

6087

SKY Italia 6096, 6088 Sky XL 6103, 6075 Skymaster 6109, 6056,

6068, 6114, 6115, 6060, 6059, 6079

Skymax 6090, 6120 Skypex 6106 Skyplus 6075, 6106,

6128, 6114

SkySat 6089, 6112, 6131, 6056

Skyvision 6114 SL 6132, 6105, 6106,

6107, 6133, 6108 SM Electronic 6109, 6056, 6115 Smart 6132, 6137, 6056, 6119, 6128, 6122, 6123, 6120, 6133

SmartVision 6062 Sony 6111, 6096, 6095,

6052, 6174

SR 6132 Star Sat 6072 Starland 6056 Starlite 6090 Stream 6088 Stream System 6127 Strong 6096, 6121, 6132,

6076, 6056, 6104, 6093, 6115

Sumin 6075 Sunny 6127 Sunsat 6056 Sunstar 6050, 6132 SuperMax 6069 Supratech 6120 Systec 6114 Tantec 6052 Targa 6067 Tatung 6052 TBoston 6103, 6121 Tecatel 6109 Technical 6104 Technika 6093, 6108,

6094 TechniSat 6089, 6137, 6052, 6112, 6091, 6098, 6092, 6099

Technomate 6126 Technosat 6069 Technosonic 6130, 6108 Technotrend 6108 Technowelt 6132, 6131 Techwood 6089, 6093,

6104, 6094

Telasat 6131 TELE System 6137, 6079,

6103, 6115

Teleciel 6076 Teleka 6137, 6112, 6131,

6076

Telesat 6131 Telestar 6089, 6112,

6091, 6098, 6092, 6099, 6103, 6114, 6108, 6104

Teletech 6089 Televes 6132, 6052,

6112, 6072, 6127, 6114, 6133

Telewire 6128 Tempo 6069 Tevion 6130, 6056, 6115,

6108, 6060 Thomson 6110, 6096, 6086, 6088, 6095, 6056, 6131, 6052, 6141, 6153, 6140

Thorn 6052 Tiny 6108 Tioko 6132 Titan 6065, 6060 TNT SAT 6134 Tokai 6090 Tonna 6052, 6112, 6056,

6079

Topfield 6074 Toshiba 6052, 6093,

6161

Trevi 6103 Triasat 6112 Triax 6096, 6090, 6132,

6135, 6065, 6129, 6104, 6079, 6137, 6089, 6133, 6120, 6071, 6140, 6103, 6119, 6056, 6112

Turnsat 6056 Twinner 6056, 6079 Unisat 6090, 6132 United 6103 Univers 6065

Page 91

Additional information

Universum 6053, 6089, 6105, 6131, 6106, 6091, 6103

Van Hunen 6102 Variosat 6053 VEA 6121 Ventana 6090 Vestel 6089, 6103, 6093,

6094

VH Sat 6105 Viasat 6149

Viola Digital 6108 Vision 6104, 6065 Visionic 6126 Visiosat 6089, 6130,

6056, 6120, 6062, 6067

Vitecom 6120 Volcasat 6121 VTech 6055 Wetekom 6112 Wewa 6052

Wharfedale 6093, 6141,

6094 Wisi 6053, 6132, 6105, 6137, 6052, 6112, 6131, 6106, 6128, 6075 Worldsat 6089, 6072, 6103, 6070

WorthIt! 6066 Woxter 6121 Xoro 6067 Xsat 6057, 6056, 6072

Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)

@sat 6127 Allvision 6075 Atsat 6127 B@ytronic 6106, 6075 Boca 6063 BskyB 6086 Bush 6130 Canal Satellite 6154 Comag 6075, 6063 Daewoo 6058 Digifusion 6145 Digihome 6094 DigiQuest 6127 Digital 6063 DMT 6068 Edision 6123 eMTech 6072 GbSAT 6072 Gecco 6075 Globo 6075 Goodmans 6130, 6094

Hirschmann 6106, 6075 Humax 6117, 6118 Huth 6068 Hyundai 6068 Kathrein 6148 LaSAT 6106 LG 6068 Luxor 6141 Maximum 6114 Mediacom 6074 MediaSat 6153 Medion 6106, 6075 Microstar 6068 Morgan’s 6075 MySky 6087, 6088 NEOTION 6114 Nichimen 6130 Nokia 6082 Opentel 6075 Orbis 6075 Pace 6087, 6149

Panasonic 6054 Philips 6139, 6153 Pilotime 6154 Pixx 6067 Proscan 6110 Rebox 6072 Sagem 6134 Samsung 6149, 6074,

6073

Sat Control 6127 Schneider 6074 Schwaiger 6106, 6068,

6075, 6063 Sedea Electronique 6074

Serd 6075 Sharp 6094 SilverCrest 6063 SKY 6086, 6088, 6087 SKY Italia 6088 Sky XL 6075

Xtreme 6127 Yakumo 6120 ZapMaster 6106 Zehnder 6089, 6138,

6055, 6068, 6128, 6103, 6114, 6075, 6120, 6123, 6125

ZENITH 6156, 6158, 6160 Zeta Technology 6090 Zodiac 6137, 6076

Skymaster 6068 Skypex 6106 Skyplus 6075, 6106, 6114 Stream System 6127 Sumin 6075 Sunny 6127 Targa 6067 TechniSat 6092, 6099 Technosonic 6130 Telestar 6092, 6099 Thomson 6086, 6141 TNT SAT 6134 Topfield 6074 Viasat 6149 Visiosat 6130, 6067 Wisi 6106 Xoro 6067 Xtreme 6127 Zehnder 6068, 6075,

6125

Pulsar 6116 Runco 6116 Sagem 6136 Salora 6116 Samsung 6097, 6116

Scientific Atlanta 6101 StarHub 6152 Supercable 6152 Telewest 6101 Thomson 6146, 6100

Toshiba 6116 UPC 6146 US Electronics 6152 Virgin Media 6097, 6101 Visiopass 6136

Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)

Freebox 6150 Humax 6124, 6100 Nokia 6084

Scientific Atlanta 6101 Telewest 6101 Thomson 6146

UPC 6146 Virgin Media 6101

CD (SACD)

Pioneer 5065, 5066 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042

Kenwood 5020, 5021,

5031

Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,

5050

Panasonic 5036

Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 RCA 5013, 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012, 5023, 5026,

5027, 5028, 5039

CD-R

Pioneer 5067 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055

Laser Disc Player

Pioneer 5062, 5063

Cassete Deck

Pioneer 5070

Zenith 6116 Ziggo 6084

TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,

5035, 5037

Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024, 5025,

5038, 5046, 5047

Cable Set Top Box

Pioneer 0197, 6081 ABC 6142 ADB 6051 Auna 6051 Austar 6152 Bell & Howell 6142 Birmingham Cable Communications 6152

Cablecom 6146 Fosgate 6152 France Telecom 6136 Freebox 6150 General Instrument

6152, 6142

Humax 6100, 6124 Jerrold 6152, 6142

Kabel Deutschland

6100

Macab 6136 Madritel 6051 Magnavox 6142 Memorex 6116 Motorola 6152 Nokia 6084

Noos 6136 NTL 6152, 6097 Optus 6152 Orange 6136 Pace 6097 Panasonic 6116 Paragon 6116 Philips 6136, 6146

Digital Tape

Pioneer 5069

Pioneer 5068

Page 92

IMPORTANTE

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

La luz intermitente con el símbolo de punta de flecha dentro un triángulo equilátero. Está convenido para avisar el usuario de la presencia de “voltaje peligrosa” no aislada dentro el producto que podría constituir un peligro de choque eléctrico para las personas.

ADVERTENCIA

Este aparato no es impermeable. Para evitar el riesgo de incendio y de descargas eléctricas, no ponga ningún recipiente lleno de líquido (como pueda ser un vaso o un florero) cerca del aparato ni lo exponga a goteo, salpicaduras, lluvia o humedad.

ADVERTENCIA

Antes de enchufar el aparato a la corriente, lea la sección siguiente con mucha atención.

La tensión de la red eléctrica es distinta según el país o región. Asegúrese de que la tensión de la alimentación de la localidad donde se proponga utilizar este aparato corresponda a la tensión necesaria (es decir, 230 V ó 120 V) indicada en el panel posterior.

PRECAUCIÓN PARA LA VENTILACIÓN

Cuando instale este aparato, asegúrese de dejar espacio en torno al mismo para la ventilación con el fin de mejorar la disipación de calor (por lo menos 40 cm encima, 10 cm detrás, y 20 cm en cada lado).

ADVERTENCIA

Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja del aparato sirven para su ventilación para poder asegurar un funcionamiento fiable del aparato y para protegerlo contra sobrecalentamiento. Para evitar el peligro de incendio, las aberturas nunca deberán taparse ni cubrirse con nada (como por ejemplo, periódicos, manteles, cortinas) ni ponerse en funcionamiento el aparato sobre una alfombra gruesas o una cama.

ATENCIÓN:

PARA PREVENIR EL PELIGRO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO NO REMOVER LA TAPA NI LAS PARTES DENTRO NO UTILIZADAS, LLAMAR UNA PERSONA CUALIFICADA.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_Es

El punto exclamativo dentro un triángulo equilátero convenido para avisar el usuário de la presencia de importantes instrucciones sobre el funcionamiento y la manutención en la libreta que acompaña el aparato.

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_Es

ADVERTENCIA

Para evitar el peligro de incendio, no ponga nada con fuego encendido (como pueda ser una vela) encima del aparato.

Entorno de funcionamiento

Temperatura y humedad del entorno de funcionamiento +5 °C a +35 °C; menos del 85 % de humedad relativa (rejillas de refrigeración no obstruidas) No instale este aparato en un lugar mal ventilado, ni en lugares expuestos a alta humedad o a la luz directa del sol (o de otra luz artificial potente).

Si la clavija del cable de alimentación de CA de este aparato no se adapta a la toma de corriente de CA que usted desea utilizar, deberá cambiar la clavija por otra que se adapte apropiadamente. El reemplazo y montaje de una clavija del cable de alimentación de CA sólo deberá realizarlos personal de servicio técnico cualificado. Si se enchufa la clavija cortada a una toma de corriente de CA, puede causar fuertes descargas eléctricas. Asegúrese de que se tira de la forma apropiada después de haberla extraído. El aparato deberá desconectarse desenchufando la clavija de la alimentación de la toma de corriente cuando no se proponga utilizarlo durante mucho tiempo (por ejemplo, antes de irse de vacaciones).

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_Es

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_Es

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_Es

PRECAUCIÓN

El interruptor de la este aparato no corta por completo toda la alimentación de la toma de corriente de CA. Puesto que el cable de alimentación hace las funciones de dispositivo de desconexión de la corriente para el aparato, para desconectar toda la alimentación del aparato deberá desenchufar el cable de la toma de corriente de CA. Por lo tanto, asegúrese de instalar el aparato de modo que el cable de alimentación pueda desenchufarse con facilidad de la toma de corriente de CA en caso de un accidente. Para evitar correr el peligro de incendio, el cable de alimentación también deberá desenchufarse de la toma de corriente de CA cuando no se tenga la intención de utilizarlo durante mucho tiempo seguido (por ejemplo, antes de irse de vacaciones).

Este producto es para tareas domésticas generales. Cualquiera avería debida a otra utilización que tareas domésticas (tales como el uso a largo plazo para motivos de negocios en un restaurante o el uso en un coche o un barco) y que necesita una reparación hará que cobrarla incluso durante el período de garantía.

alimentación STANDBY/ON de

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_Es

K041_A1_Es

Page 93

Gracias por comprar este producto Pioneer. Lea detenidamente este manual de instrucciones para saber cómo operar este modelo adecuadamente. Una vez haya leído las instrucciones, guárdelas en un lugar seguro para futura referencia.

Contenido

01 Antes de comenzar

Comprobación del contenido de la caja .......6

Instalación del receptor .................................6

Instalación de las pilas ................................... 6

Alcance del mando a distancia .....................6

Cancelación de la visualización de

demostración ..................................................6

Acerca del funcionamiento del receptor con un terminal móvil

(iPod, iPhone, etc.) ......................................... 6

Acerca del uso del AVNavigator

(CD-ROM incluido) .........................................7

02 Controles e indicadores

Mando a distancia .......................................... 8

Indicadores...................................................... 9

Panel frontal ..................................................10

03 Conexión del equipo

Conexión del equipo .....................................11

Panel trasero .................................................11

Determinación de la aplicación de los

altavoces ........................................................ 12

Colocación de los altavoces ........................13

Conexión de los altavoces ............................ 13

Instalación del sistema de altavoces .......... 14

Selección del sistema de altavoces ............15

Acerca de la conexión de audio ..................16

Acerca del convertidor de vídeo .................. 16

Acerca de HDMI ........................................... 16

Conexión a su televisor y componentes

de reproducción ............................................ 17

Conexión a una grabadora HDD/DVD,

grabadora BD y otras fuentes de vídeo ......19

Conexión de un receptor satelital/por

cable o de otro tipo .......................................19

Conexión de otros componentes

de audio .........................................................20

Conexión de antenas de AM/FM .................20

Configuración MULTI-ZONE ........................21

Conexión a la red mediante la interfaz

LAN ................................................................ 21

Conexión del ADAPTADOR Bluetooth

opcional ......................................................... 22

Conexión de un iPod ....................................22

Conexión de un aparato USB ...................... 22

Conexión de un componente equipado

con HDMI a la entrada del panel frontal .... 23

Conexión al terminal de vídeo del panel

frontal .............................................................23

Conexión a una LAN inalámbrica ...............23

Conexión de un receptor IR .........................23

Utilización de otros componentes

Pioneer con el sensor de esta unidad ........24

Conexión del receptor .................................. 24

04 Configuración básica

Cambio del ajuste del formato de TV .......... 25

Cambio del paso de frecuencia ...................25

Cambio del idioma de la OSD

(OSD Language) ........................................... 25

Ajuste óptimo automático del sonido (Configuración totalmente automática

de MCACC) .................................................... 25

El menú Input Setup .....................................27

Configuración del modo de operación .......28

05 Reproducción básica

Reproducción de una fuente ....................... 29

Reproducción de un iPod ............................29

Reproducción de un aparato USB .............. 30

Recepción de radio ....................................... 32

ADAPTADOR Bluetooth para disfrutar

de música inalámbrica ................................33

06 Uso del sistema

Reproducción automática ...........................35

Reproducción con sonido envolvente ........ 35

Uso de alimentación directa ....................... 36

Selección de memorias MCACC ................. 36

Selección de la señal de entrada ................ 36

Mejor sonido con el control de fase ............ 37

07 Reproducción con entradas HOME

MEDIA GALLERY

Disfrute de Home Media Gallery .................38

Características de Home Media Gallery ..... 38

Introducción ..................................................38

Reproducción con Home Media Gallery .... 39

Operaciones avanzadas para radio de

Internet .......................................................... 40

Acerca de la reproducción de la red ........... 41

Acerca de los formatos de archivo

reproducibles ................................................42

08 Función Control con HDMI

Acerca de la función Control con HDMI .... 43

Para hacer conexiones de Control con

HDMI ..............................................................43

Configuración de HDMI ...............................43

Antes de usar la sincronización .................. 44

Acerca de las operaciones

sincronizadas ................................................ 44

Ajuste de la función PQLS ...........................44

Precauciones para la función Control

con HDMI ......................................................45

09 Uso de otras funciones

Ajuste de las opciones de audio .................46

Ajuste de las opciones de vídeo .................. 48

Selección de terminales de altavoces ........49

Uso de los controles MULTI-ZONE..............50

Cómo hacer una grabación de audio o

vídeo ............................................................... 50

Cómo reducir el nivel de una señal

analógica ....................................................... 50

Cómo utilizar el temporizador de

desconexión ..................................................51

Cómo atenuar la pantalla ............................51

Cómo comprobar los ajustes del sistema ...51

Cómo restablecer el sistema ....................... 51

10 Control de otros componentes del

sistema

Acerca del menú Remote Setup .................53

Utilización de múltiples receptores ............53

Uso del mando a distancia para

controlar otros componentes ......................53

Selección directa de códigos

de preajuste ...................................................54

Programación de señales de otros

mandos a distancia ......................................54

Borrado de uno de los botones

programados en el mando a distancia .......55

Borrado de todos los ajustes memorizados que están en una

función de entrada .......................................55

Función directa ............................................. 55

Operación múltiple y apagado

del sistema ....................................................55

Restablecimiento de los ajustes del

mando a distancia ........................................ 56

Control de componentes ............................. 57

11 El menú Advanced MCACC

Cómo hacer ajustes del receptor en el

menú Advanced MCACC .............................59

MCACC automática (Experto) ..................... 59

Configuración manual de MCACC ............. 61

Verificación de datos de la MCACC ............64

Gestión de datos ........................................... 65

12 Menús System Setup y Other

Setup

Cómo hacer ajustes del receptor en el

menú System Setup .....................................66

Configuración manual de los altavoces .....66

Menú Network Setup ................................... 68

Verificación de la información de la red .....70

El menú Other Setup ....................................70

Page 94

13 Información adicional

Solución de problemas 1 .............................73

Solución de problemas 2 .............................80

Solución de problemas de la LAN

inalámbrica ...................................................83

Acerca de los mensajes de estado .............85

Información importante relacionada

con la conexión HDMI .................................. 85

Limpieza del equipo ...................................... 85

Formatos de sonido envolvente...................86

Acerca del iPod ............................................. 86

Acerca de FLAC ............................................86

Sonido Envolvente automático, ALC y Alimentación Directa con formatos de

señal de entrada diferentes .........................87

Distribuidores autorizados por Pioneer......88

Glosario .......................................................... 88

Índice de características ..............................91

Especificaciones ...........................................92

Lista de códigos preajustados .....................93

Page 95

Organigrama de ajustes del receptor

Organigrama para conexiones y ajustes del receptor

La unidad es un receptor AV completo equipado con abundancia de funciones y terminales. Se puede usar fácilmente siguiendo el procedimiento de abajo para hacer las conexiones y ajustes.

Elemento de ajuste necesario: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Ajuste que resulta necesario hacer: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12

Importante

Los ajustes iniciales del receptor se pueden hacer en el ordenador usando Wiring Navi del CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido con el receptor. En este caso se pueden hacer virtualmente las mismas conexiones y ajustes que en los pasos 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 y 8. Para conocer instrucciones de uso del AVNavigator, consulte Acerca del uso del AVNavigator (CD-ROM incluido) en página 7 .

1 Antes de comenzar

! Comprobación del contenido de la caja en página 6 ! Instalación de las pilas en página 6

2 Determinación de la aplicación de los altavoces (página 12)

! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros altos) ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (delanteros anchos) ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales y conexión de altavoces B ! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de biamplificación delantera (sonido

envolvente de alta calidad)

! Sistema de sonido envolvente de 5.1 canales y conexión de ZONE 2 (Multizona)

3 Conexión de los altavoces

! Colocación de los altavoces en página 13 ! Conexión de los altavoces en página 13 ! Instalación del sistema de altavoces en página 14 ! Biamplificación de los altavoces en página 15

4 Conexión de los componentes

! Acerca de la conexión de audio en página 16 ! Acerca del convertidor de vídeo en página 16 ! Conexión a su televisor y componentes de reproducción en página 17 ! Conexión de antenas de AM/FM en página 20 ! Conexión del receptor en página 24

5 Encendido

6 Ajustes iniciales de acuerdo con la región y el entorno en los que usted vive

! Cambio del ajuste del formato de TV (página 25) ! Cambio del paso de frecuencia (página 25) ! Cambio del idioma de la OSD (OSD Language) (página 25)

7 Ajustes de altavoces MCACC

! Ajuste óptimo automático del sonido (Configuración totalmente automática de MCACC)

en página 25

8 El menú Input Setup (página 27)

(Cuando se usan otras conexiones que no son las recomendadas)

9 Reproducción básica (página 29)

10 Ajuste de la calidad del sonido y de la imagen según se quiera

! Uso de varios modos de escucha (página 35) ! Mejor sonido con el control de fase (página 37) ! Medición de todos los tipos de EQ (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (página 59) ! Cambio del nivel del canal durante la escucha (página 68) ! Encendido/apagado del EQ de calibración acústica, el recuperador automático de sonido o la

mejora de diálogos (página 46)

! Ajuste de la función PQLS (página 44) ! Ajuste de las opciones de audio (página 46) ! Ajuste de las opciones de vídeo (página 48)

11 Otras configuraciones y ajustes opcionales

! Función Control con HDMI (página 43) ! El menú Advanced MCACC (página 59) ! Menús System Setup y Other Setup (página 66)

12 Máximo provecho del mando a distancia

! Utilización de múltiples receptores (página 53) ! Uso del mando a distancia para controlar otros componentes (página 53)

Page 96

01 Antes de comenzar

Antes de comenzar

Comprobación del contenido de la caja

Compruebe que ha recibido todos los accesorios siguientes:

! Micrófono de configuración (cable: 5 m) ! Mando a distancia ! Pilas secas IEC R03 tamaño AAA (para

confirmar el funcionamiento del sistema) x2

! Antena de cuadro de AM ! Antena alámbrica de FM ! Cable iPod ! Cable de alimentación ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! Este manual de instrucciones

Instalación del receptor

! Cuando instale el equipo, asegúrese de

colocarlo sobre una superficie nivelada y estable.

! No lo instale en los lugares siguientes:

— sobre un televisor en color (la imagen podría

distorsionarse en la pantalla)

— cerca de una pletina de casete (o cerca

de un dispositivo que genere un campo magnético). Esto podría interferir con el sonido.

— a la luz directa del sol — en lugares húmedos o mojados — en lugares extremadamente calurosos o fríos — en lugares que sean objeto de vibraciones u

otros movimientos

— en lugares donde haya mucho polvo — en lugares donde haya vapores o aceites

calientes (p. ej., en una cocina)

! No toque el panel inferior del receptor

mientras la alimentación está conectada o justo después de desconectarla. Éste se calienta cuando la alimentación está

conectada (o justo después de apagarla) y tocarlo puede causar quemaduras.

Instalación de las pilas

Las pilas suministradas con la unidad son para verificar las operaciones iniciales; puede que no duren mucho tiempo. Recomendamos usar pilas alcalinas de duración más larga.

ADVERTENCIA

! No utilice ni guarde las pilas a la luz solar

directa ni en otros lugares de mucho calor como, por ejemplo, dentro de un automóvil o cerca de una calefacción. Esto puede ser la causa de que las pilas tengan pérdidas, se sobrecalienten, revienten o se incendien. También se puede reducir la duración o el rendimiento de las pilas.

PRECAUCIÓN

El uso incorrecto de las pilas puede provocar situaciones peligrosas tales como fugas y explosión. Tenga en cuenta las siguientes precauciones: ! Nunca utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo

tiempo.

! Instale las pilas correctamente, haciendo

coincidir los polos positivo y negativo de las mismas con las marcas de polaridad impresas en el compartimiento de las pilas.

! Aunque distintas pilas tengan la misma

forma, pueden tener tensiones diferentes. No mezcle pilas de distinto tipo.

! Cuando tiene que desembarazarte de las

baterías usadas, por favor se adapte a los reglamentos gubernamentales o a las disposiciones en materia ambiental en vigor en su país o área.

(Ejemplos de símbolos para baterías)

Estos símbolos sólo son válidos en la Unión Europea.

K058c_A1_Es

Alcance del mando a distancia

El mando a distancia puede no funcionar correctamente si: ! Hay obstáculos entre el mando a distancia y el

sensor de mando a distancia del receptor.

! El sensor de mando a distancia está expuesto

a la luz directa del sol o a luz fluorescente.

! El receptor está instalado cerca de un

dispositivo que emite rayos infrarrojos.

! Se utiliza simultáneamente otro mando a

distancia por infrarrojos para controlar el receptor.

30°

7 m

Cancelación de la visualización de demostración

En este receptor, el modo de demostración se activa de forma predeterminada. Cuando se conecta la alimentación, la visualización de demostración se establece y se muestran varias ilustraciones en la pantalla del panel frontal. Para cancelar la visualización de demostración, conecte el cable de alimentación y haga la operación de abajo. ! El modo de demostración se cancela

automáticamente cuando se realiza la operación Full Auto MCACC.

1 Ponga el receptor en modo de espera. 2 Pulse ENTER mientras mantiene

pulsado u STANDBY/ON en el panel frontal.

Aparecerá RESET c NO d en la pantalla.

3 Seleccione ‘FL DEMO’ usando TUNE i/j.

4 Use PRESET k/l para seleccionar FL DEMO c OFF d y luego pulse u STANDBY/ON en el panel frontal.

Acerca del funcionamiento del receptor con un terminal móvil (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

El receptor se puede controlar desde el terminal móvil instalando una aplicación especial en el terminal móvil. Para conocer detalles, consulte la información del producto en el sitio Web de Pioneer. Esta aplicación especial puede cambiar o cancelarse sin previo aviso.

Page 97

Antes de comenzar

Acerca del uso del AVNavigator (CD-ROM incluido)

El CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido contiene Wiring Navi que le permite hacer fácilmente las conexiones y los ajustes del receptor a modo de diálogo. Los ajustes iniciales de alta precisión se pueden completar fácilmente siguiendo las instrucciones de la pantalla para hacer las conexiones y los ajustes. También hay otras características que permiten usar fácilmente varias funciones, incluyendo un manual interactivo que funciona junto con el receptor, y actualizar varios tipos de software, y la aplicación MCACC que le permite verificar los resultados de las mediciones MCACC en gráficos 3D.

Instalación del AVNavigator

1 Cargue el CD-ROM del AVNavigator en la unidad CD de su ordenador.

! La pantalla de instalación se visualiza. Vaya

al paso 2.

! Si no aparece la pantalla de instalación, haga

doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM y luego inicie el instalador (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).

2 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla para hacer la instalación.

Cuando se selecciona “Finish”, la instalación termina.

3 Retire el CD-ROM del AVNavigator incluido de la unidad CD del ordenador.

Manejo del CD-ROM

Entorno de funcionamiento

! Este CD-ROM se puede usar con Microsoft®

Windows® XP/Vista/7.

! Para las funciones del AVNavigator se usa

a menudo un explorador. Los exploradores compatibles son los Internet Explorer 6, 7

y 8 de Microsoft. Con otros exploradores, algunas funciones puede que se limiten o la visualización puede que no aparezca bien.

Además, incluso con un explorador

compatible, dependiendo de sus ajustes, algunas funciones pueden estar limitadas y puede que la visualización no sea apropiada.

Precauciones para el Uso

! Este CD-ROM es para utilizarse con un PC.

No se puede utilizarlo con un reproductor de DVD o reproductor de CD de música. Intentar reproducir este CD-ROM con un reproductor de DVD o reproductor de CD de música puede dañar los altavoces o perjudiciar la audición debido al volumen muy alto.

Licencia

! Asegúrese de aceptar los “Términos de Uso”

que se indican a continuación antes de utilizar este CD-ROM. No utilice si no está de acuerdo con los términos de uso.

Acepte también el “Acuerdo de licencia”

visualizado al instalar el AVNavigator.

Términos de Uso

! Los derechos de autor de los datos que

se proveen en este CD-ROM pertenecen a PIONEER CORPORATION. La transferencia, duplicación, transmisión, divulgación pública, traducción, venta, préstamo u otros asuntos relacionados no autorizados que estén fuera del contexto del “uso personal” o “citación” como se define en la Ley de los Derechos de Autor pueden estar sujetos a acciones punitivas. Se otorga el permiso para utilizar este CD-ROM bajo licencia de PIONEER CORPORATION.

Renuncia de Responsabilidad

! PIONEER CORPORATION no garantiza

el funcionamiento de este CD-ROM con respecto a cualquier PC con los sistemas operativos aplicables. Además, PIONEER CORPORATION no será responsable de cualesquiera daños ocasionados por el uso de

este CD-ROM, ni tampoco será responsable de ninguna indemnización. Los nombres de compañías privadas, productos y otras entidades que se describen aquí son las marcas registradas o marcas comerciales de sus respectivos propietarios.

Uso del AVNavigator

1 Haga clic en [AVNavigator] del escritorio para iniciar el AVNavigator.

AVNavigator y Wiring Navi se inician. La pantalla de selección de idioma aparece. Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para hacer las conexiones y los ajustes automáticos. Wiring Navi sólo se inicia automáticamente la primera vez que se inicia el AVNavigator.

2 Seleccione y use la función deseada.

El AVNavigator incluye las funciones siguientes:

! Wiring Navi – Le guía por las conexiones y

los ajustes iniciales en forma de diálogo. Los ajustes iniciales de alta precisión se pueden hacer fácilmente.

! Interactive Manual – Visualiza

automáticamente las páginas que explican las funciones que han sido activadas en el receptor. También es posible manejar el receptor desde el manual interactivo.

! Glossary – Visualiza las páginas del glosario. ! MCACC Appli – Visualiza claramente los

resultados de las mediciones Advanced MCACC en el ordenador.

Para la aplicación MCACC hay

instrucciones de manejo especiales. Estas instrucciones se incluyen en los menús del Interactive Manual del AVNavigator. Consúltelas cuando use la aplicación MCACC.

! Software Update – Permite actualizar

varios tipos de software.

! Settings – Se usa para hacer varios ajustes

del AVNavigator.

! Detection – Se usa para detectar el receptor.

Nota

Para usar el AVNavigator de otro modelo, desinstale (elimine) primero el AVNavigator de este receptor y luego instale el AVNavigator del otro modelo.

Eliminación del AVNavigator

Para desinstalar (eliminar) el AVNavigator de su PC puede usar el método siguiente.

% Elimínelo desde el panel de control del PC.

Desde el menú de inicio, haga clic en “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator (VSX-1021 o VSX-921)” d “Uninstall”.

Page 98

02 Controles e indicadores

Controles e indicadores

Mando a distancia

Esta sección explica cómo utilizar el mando a distancia para el receptor.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

2,3

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVD DVR

SAT

HMG

CDTV

USB

iPod

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

iPod CTRL

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

S.RETRIEVER

1 3

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

TV CTRL

TUNER

VIDEO

RECEIVER

ZONE 2

SELECT

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

VOL

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN

TUNE

PGM

CTRL STATUS

PHASE

AUDIO

MCACC SLEEP

54 6

DIMMER

807 9

CLASS

ENTER

STEREO STANDARDADV SURR

LISTENING MODE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ADPT

VIDEO

T.EDIT

INFO

DISP

12 13

PRESET

El mando a distancia presenta un código de colores según el control del componente utilizando el siguiente sistema:

! Blanco – Control de receptor, control de

televisor

! Azul – Otros controles (Consulte la páginas

29, 30, 32, 33 y 57.)

1 u RECEIVER

Para encender y apagar (modo de espera) el receptor.

2 MULTI OPERATION

Use este botón para realizar múltiples operaciones (página 55).

3 RCU SETUP

Úselo para introducir el código preestablecido cuando se hacen ajustes de mando a distancia y para seleccionar el modo del mando a distancia (página 53).

4 Botones de función de entrada

Púlselos para controlar otros componentes (página 53). Utilice INPUT SELECT c/ d para seleccionar la función de entrada (página 29).

5 ZONE 2

Cambian para hacer operaciones en la ZONE 2 (página 50).

6 Botones TV CONTROL

Estos botones se utilizan exclusivamente para controlar el televisor asignado al botón

TV CTRL.

7 Botones de ajuste del receptor

Para acceder a este botón, primero se debe pulsar :

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Utilice este botón

para acceder a las opciones de audio (página

46).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Utilice este botón

para acceder a las opciones de vídeo (página

48).

! HOME MENU – Utilice este botón para

acceder al menú inicial (páginas 25, 27, 43, 59 y 66).

! RETURN – Púlselo para confirmar las

opciones seleccionadas y salir del menú actual.

8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Utilice los botones de flecha para configurar su sistema de sonido envolvente (consulte la página 59) y las opciones de audio o vídeo (página 46 o 48).

9 Botones de control del receptor

Para acceder a este botón, primero se debe pulsar :

! PHASE CTRL – Pulse este botón para activar/

desactivar el control de fase (página 37).

! STATUS – Pulse este botón para comprobar

los ajustes del receptor seleccionados (página 51).

! PQLS – Pulse este botón para seleccionar el

ajuste PQLS (página 44).

! S.RETRIEVER – Pulse para restablecer el

sonido de calidad CD en las fuentes de audio comprimido (página 46).

! SIGNAL SEL – Utilice este botón para

seleccionar una señal de entrada (página

36).

! MCACC – Pulse este botón para cambiar

entre las memorias MCACC (página 36).

! SLEEP – Utilice este botón para poner

el receptor en el modo de desconexión automática y seleccionar el tiempo que debe transcurrir antes de que el receptor entre en este modo (página 51).

! CH LEVEL – Pulse este botón repetidamente

para seleccionar un canal; a continuación, utilice los botones k/l para ajustar el nivel (página 68).

! A.ATT – Para atenuar (reducir) el nivel de

una señal de entrada analógica para evitar que se produzca distorsión (página 50).

! DIMMER – Para reducir o incrementar la

luminosidad de la pantalla (página 51).

10 Controles LISTENING MODE

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Cambia entre los

modos de sonido envolvente automático (página 35), control de nivel automático y Stream Direct (página 36).

! STEREO – Pulse para seleccionar el modo de

reproducción estéreo (página 35).

! STANDARD – Pulse este botón para utilizar

una descodificación estándar y para cambiar varios modos (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.) (página 35).

! ADV SURR – Utilice este botón para

cambiar entre los distintos modos de sonido envolvente (página 36).

11 LED de mando a distancia

Se enciende cuando se envía un comando desde el mando a distancia.

12 TV CTRL

Establece el código preestablecido del fabricante de su televisor cuando controla el televisor (página 54).

Para poner el mando a distancia en el modo de control de receptor (se utiliza para seleccionar los comandos blancos). Cambian para hacer operaciones en la zona principal. Utilice también este botón para configurar el sonido envolvente.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Utilice este botón para ajustar el nivel de volumen.

15 MUTE

Para silenciar/restablecer el sonido (el sonido también se restablece si se ajusta el volumen).

Page 99

Controles e indicadores

Indicadores

21 3 9754 108 11 12 13

AUTO

HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG

AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x

ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SP AB

L C R SL SR XL XR

LFE

Neo:6

SLEEP

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

CD-R

1 Indicadores de señales

Se iluminan para indicar la señal de entrada seleccionada actualmente. AUTO se ilumina cuando el receptor está ajustado para que seleccione la señal de entrada automáticamente (página 36).

2 Indicadores de formato de programa

Se ilumina para indicar los canales en los que se introducen señales digitales.

! L/R – Canal delantero izquierdo/derecho ! C – Canal central ! SL/SR – Canal de sonido envolvente

izquierdo/derecho

! LFE – Canal de efectos de baja frecuencia

(los indicadores (( )) se iluminan cuando se recibe una señal LFE)

! XL/XR – Dos canales que no son los de

arriba

! XC – Un canal que no sea los de arriba,

el canal de sonido envolvente mono o la bandera de codificación de matriz

3 Indicadores de formato digital

Se ilumina cuando se detecta una señal codificada en el formato correspondiente.

! 2 DIGITAL – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby Digital.

! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby Digital Plus.

! 2 TrueHD – Se ilumina con la

decodificación Dolby TrueHD.

DSD PCM MULTI-ZONE S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX

TUNER

TUNED

ATT

OVER

VIDEO HMG HDMI

STEREO MONO

[ 2 ]

USB

[ 3 ]

iPod

PQLS

DVD

18 1915 16 17

ALC

DVR

! DTS – Se ilumina con la decodificación DTS. ! DTS HD – Se ilumina con la decodificación

DTS-HD.

! 96/24 – Se ilumina con la decodificación

DTS 96/24.

! DSD PCM – Se ilumina durante la conversión

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) a PCM con SACDs.

! PCM – Se ilumina durante la reproducción

de señales PCM.

! MSTR – Se enciende durante la

reproducción de las señales de DTS-HD Master Audio.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Se ilumina cuando la función MULTI-ZONE está activa (página 50).

5 SOUND

Se ilumina cuando se selecciona la característica DIALOG E (mejora de diálogos) o TONE (controles de tono) (página 46).

6 S.RTRV

Se ilumina cuando la función del recuperador de sonido está activada (página 46).

7 Indicadores de modo de audición

! AUTO SURROUND – Se enciende cuando se

activa la función Auto Surround (página 35).

! ALC – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona el

ALC (control automático de nivel) (página

35).

[ 4 ]

! STREAM DIRECT – Se ilumina cuando está

seleccionado Modo directo/Modo directo

puro (página 36).

! ADV.SURROUND – Se ilumina cuando se

selecciona uno de los modos de sonido

envolvente avanzado (página 36).

! STANDARD – Se ilumina cuando está

activado uno de los modos de sonido envolvente estándar (página 35).

8 (PHASE CONTROL)

Se ilumina cuando está activada la función de control de fase (página 37).

9 Indicadores de señal analógica

Se encienden para indicar una reducción en el nivel de una señal analógica (página 50).

17 Indicadores de formato de descodificación de matriz

! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – Se ilumina para indicar

la descodificación de 2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx (página 35).

! Neo:6 – Cuando uno de los modos Neo:6

del receptor está activo, este indicador se ilumina para indicar el procesamiento de Neo:6 (página 35).

18 Pantalla de visualización de caracteres

Muestra distinta información del sistema.

19 Indicador de modo de control remoto

Se ilumina para indicar el ajuste de mando a distancia del receptor. (No se visualiza cuando se pone en 1.) (página 71)

10 Indicadores del sintonizador

! TUNED – Se ilumina durante la recepción de

una emisión de radio.

! STEREO – Se ilumina durante la recepción

de una emisión de FM estéreo en modo estéreo automático.

! MONO – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona el

modo monoaural con MPX.

Se ilumina cuando se silencia el sonido.

12 Nivel de volumen principal

Indica el nivel de volumen general. “---” corresponde al nivel mínimo y “+12dB” corresponde al nivel máximo.

13 Indicadores de función de entrada

Se iluminan para indicar la función de entrada que usted ha seleccionado.

14 Indicadores de desplazamiento

Se iluminan cuando hay más elementos seleccionables al hacer varios ajustes.

15 Indicadores de altavoces

Se ilumina para indicar el sistema de altavoces actual usando SPEAKERS (página 49).

16 SLEEP

Se ilumina cuando el receptor se encuentra en modo de desconexión automática (página 51).

Page 100

02 Controles e indicadores

Panel frontal

1 2 53 34 6 7 8

AUDIO/ VIDEO MULTI-CH ANNEL RECEIVER

ADVANCED

MCACC

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

SPEAKERS CONTROL – MULTI-ZONE – ON/OFF BAND TUNER EDIT TUNE PRESET ENTER

PHONES

AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

STANDARD SURROUND

109 11 12 13 1614

1 u STANDBY/ON

Para encender y apagar (modo de espera) el receptor.

2 Dial INPUT SELECTOR

Utilice este dial para seleccionar una función de entrada.

3 Indicadores

! ADVANCED MCACC – Se enciende

cuando EQ se pone en ON en el menú AUDIO PARAMETER (página 46).

! FL OFF – Se ilumina cuando se selecciona

“off” (no se visualiza nada) con el ajuste de intensidad de iluminación de la pantalla (página 51).

! HDMI – Parpadea cuando se conecta un

componente equipado con HDMI; se ilumina cuando el componente está conectado (página 17).

5V 2.1

USB

VIDEO 2 INPUT

L AUDIO R VIDEO

HDMI 2 INPUT

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT

5V 2.1

iPod

iPhone

iPad

CONTROLSTEREO

USB

MCACC

SETUP MIC

ADVANCED SURROUND

iPod

iPhone

iPad

12 15 13

! iPod iPhone iPad – Se ilumina para indicar

que el iPod/iPhone/iPad está conectado (página 22).

4 Controles MULTI-ZONE

Si ha realizado conexiones MULTI-ZONE (página 21), use estos controles para controlar la zona secundaria desde la zona principal (página 50).

5 Pantalla de visualización de caracteres

Consulte Indicadores en página 9 .

6 Controles TUNER

! BAND – Para cambiar entre las bandas de

radio AM y FM (página 32).

! TUNER EDIT – Utilice este botón junto con

TUNE i/j, PRESET k/l y ENTER para

memorizar emisoras y asignarles nombres (página 32).

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

VSX-1021

VSX-921

! TUNE i/j – Encuentran frecuencias de

radio (página 32).

! PRESET k/l – Encuentran emisoras

presintonizadas (página 32).

VSX

-1021

7 Sensor de mando a distancia

Recibe las señales del mando a distancia (página 6).

15 Entrada AUDIO/VIDEO

Consulte Conexión al terminal de vídeo del panel frontal en página 23 .

16 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Cambie la entrada del receptor a iPod y active las operaciones del iPod en el propio iPod (página 30).

8 Dial MASTER VOLUME 9 SPEAKERS

Use este botón para cambiar terminales de

MASTER VOLUME

altavoces (página 49).

10 Conector PHONES

Utilícelo para conectar un par de auriculares. Cuando se conecta un par de auriculares, los altavoces no emiten sonido.

11 Botones del modo de escucha

! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT

– Cambia entre los modos de sonido envolvente automático (página 35), control de nivel automático y Stream Direct (página

36).

! STANDARD SURROUND – Pulse para hacer

la descodificación estándar y cambiar varios modos (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo, etc.) (página 35).

! ADVANCED SURROUND – Utilice este

botón para cambiar entre los distintos modos de sonido envolvente (página 36).

! STEREO – Pulse para seleccionar el modo de

reproducción estéreo (página 35).

12 Conector MCACC SETUP MIC

Conecte aquí el micrófono suministrado (página 25).

13 Terminales iPod iPhone iPad USB

Se usa para conectar su Apple iPod/iPhone/ iPad como fuente de audio y vídeo (página 22), o para conectar un dispositivo USB para reproducir audio y fotos (página 22).

14 Conector de entrada HDMI

Se usa para conectar a un aparato HDMI compatible (videocámara, etc.) (página 23).